Mercedes Benz 2006 Cls 500 Users Manual C219.boo

Mercedes-Benz-2006-Cls-Class-500-And-55Amg-Owners-Manual-763339 mercedes-benz-2006-cls-class-500-and-55amg-owners-manual-763339

2015-02-05

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2006-Cls-500-Users-Manual-398541 mercedes-benz-2006-cls-500-users-manual-398541 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 498

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Bild in der Größe
215x70 mm einfügen

Ê5ÀtHr%Ë
2195844082

Order No. 6515 1417 13 Part No. 219 584 40 82 USA Edition C 2006

Operator’s Manual CLS-Class

Operator’s Manual
CLS-Class

CLS 500
CLS 55 AMG

Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.

앫

Please read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.

Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your
desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.

앫

Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to assist you with the operation
of your Mercedes-Benz.

앫

Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.

Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
as well as your and your passengers' safety, we ask you to make a small investment
of time:

We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company

Contents

Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada......................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
Vehicle data recording......................... 19
Information regarding electronic
recording devices........................... 19

At a glance .......................................... 21
Cockpit................................................. 22
Instrument cluster ................................ 24
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26
Center console ..................................... 27
Upper part ...................................... 27
Lower part ...................................... 28
Overhead control panel ........................ 29
Storage compartments......................... 30
Door control panel................................ 32

Getting started ................................... 33
Unlocking ............................................. 34
Unlocking with the SmartKey.......... 34
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 35
Starter switch positions .................. 36
Adjusting .............................................. 39
Seats............................................... 39
Steering wheel ................................ 41
Mirrors ............................................ 44

Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Parking brake .................................
Driving ............................................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals ....................................
Windshield wipers...........................
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off engine...........................
Releasing seat belts........................
Locking ...........................................

46
46
49
51
52
53
53
54
56
58
59
59
60
60
61

Contents

Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety...................................
Air bags ..........................................
Seat belts .......................................
Active head restraints ....................
Children in the vehicle....................
Blocking of rear door window
operation........................................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Activating .......................................
Deactivating ...................................
Driving safety systems.........................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
ESP® ..............................................
Electro-hydraulic brake system ......
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm system..................
Tow-away alarm .............................

63
64
65
70
74
75
82
83
83
83
84
84
86
86
89
93
93
93
95

Controls in detail ............................... 97
Locking and unlocking ......................... 98
SmartKey ....................................... 98
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 103
Opening the doors from the inside 111
Opening the trunk ........................ 112
Closing the trunk.......................... 114
Trunk emergency release ............. 120
Valet locking ................................ 121
Automatic central locking ............ 122
Locking and unlocking from
the inside ..................................... 122
Seats ................................................. 124
Front seat active head restraint ... 124
Rear seat head restraints ............. 124
Lumbar support............................ 125
Multicontour seat*....................... 126
Drive-Dynamic seat* with
multicontour features................... 127
Seat heating*............................... 128
Seat ventilation* .......................... 130

Memory function ............................... 131
Storing positions into memory..... 132
Recalling positions from memory. 132
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ........................... 133
Lighting ............................................. 134
Exterior lamp switch .................... 134
Combination switch ..................... 138
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
(CLS with Bi-Xenon* headlamps) . 139
Hazard warning flasher ................ 140
Interior lighting in the front .......... 141
Interior lighting in the rear ........... 142
Door entry lamps ......................... 143
Trunk lamp................................... 143
Instrument cluster ............................. 144
Instrument cluster illumination .... 144
Coolant temperature indicator..... 145
Trip odometer .............................. 146
Tachometer.................................. 146
Outside temperature indicator..... 146

Contents

Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AUDIO menu ................................
NAV* menu..................................
Distronic* menu...........................
Vehicle status message memory
menu............................................
Settings menu..............................
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu* ...................................
Automatic transmission.....................
Gear selector lever position .........
Driving tips...................................
Gear ranges .................................
Automatic shift program ..............
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting ..................................
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting .................
Manual shift program
CLS 55 AMG ................................
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) ......................

147
147
148
150
153
153
155
155
156
157
171
172
176
178
180
181
182
183
184
187
190

Good visibility ..................................... 191
Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 191
Rear view mirrors.......................... 191
Sun visors ..................................... 193
Rear window sunshade* ............... 194
Rear window defroster.................. 195
4-zone automatic climate control ....... 196
Deactivating the climate control
system .......................................... 201
Operating the climate control
system in automatic mode............ 202
Setting the temperature................ 203
Adjusting air distribution............... 204
Adjusting air volume ..................... 205
Front defroster.............................. 205
Maximum cooling MAX COOL ....... 206
Air recirculation mode .................. 206
Air conditioning............................. 209
Residual heat and ventilation
(Canada only)................................ 209
Rear air conditioning..................... 210
Front center console storage
compartment ventilation............... 213

Power windows .................................. 214
Opening and closing the windows 214
Synchronizing power windows...... 216
Summer opening feature .............. 217
Convenience closing feature......... 217
Power tilt /sliding sunroof ................. 219
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 219
Synchronizing the power tilt/
sliding sunroof .............................. 221
Driving systems.................................. 222
Cruise control ............................... 222
Distronic* ..................................... 226
Airmatic DC (Dual Control) ........... 238
Parktronic system
(Parking assist)* ........................... 242
Loading .............................................. 246
Roof rack* .................................... 246
Loading instructions ..................... 247
Ski sack* (Canada only) ............... 247
Cargo tie-down hooks................... 250

Contents

Useful features ..................................
Storage compartments.................
Cup holders..................................
Ashtrays .......................................
Cigarette lighter ...........................
Power outlet.................................
Floormats .....................................
Telephone*...................................
Tele Aid ........................................
Garage door opener* ...................

251
251
255
257
258
259
260
260
261
270

Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .........
Driving instructions............................
Drive sensibly – save fuel.............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes..........................................
Driving off ....................................
Parking.........................................
Tires .............................................
Hydroplaning................................
Tire traction..................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water.............................
Passenger compartment ..............
Driving abroad..............................
Control and operation of radio
transmitter ...................................
Catalytic converter.......................
Emission control ..........................
Coolant temperature....................

277
278
279
279
279
279
280
280
282
282
282
283
284
284
285
287
287
287
287
288
289
289

At the gas station ..............................
Refueling......................................
Check regularly and before a
long trip .......................................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level................
Coolant level ................................
Battery .........................................
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*.........
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Tire care and maintenance...........
Direction of rotation.....................
Loading the vehicle ......................
Recommended tire inflation
pressure.......................................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
MOExtended system*...................
Tire labeling .................................
Load identification .......................

290
290
291
293
293
294
297
297
299
300
301
301
302
304
304
311
313
321
322
326

Contents

DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) .............................................
Maximum tire load .......................
Maximum tire inflation pressure ..
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles) .............
Tire ply material ...........................
Tire and loading terminology........
Rotating tires ...............................
Winter driving ....................................
Winter tires ..................................
Block heater* (Canada only) ........
Snow chains.................................
Maintenance......................................
Maintenance service indicator
message.......................................
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator...........................
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator...........................
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........

327
328
329
329
331
332
335
336
336
337
337
339
339
340
341
342
342

Practical hints .................................. 351
What to do if … ................................... 352
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 352
Lamp in center console................. 362
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display..................... 363
Where will I find ...? ............................ 398
First aid kit.................................... 398
TIREFIT*........................................ 398
Spare wheel .................................. 398
Vehicle tool kit.............................. 399
Luggage box ................................. 401
Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 402
Unlocking the vehicle.................... 402
Locking the vehicle ....................... 403
Fuel filler flap emergency release . 404
Manually unlocking the gear
selector lever ................................ 404
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 406
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............. 406
Resetting activated head restraints.... 407
Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 408
SmartKey ...................................... 408
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ....... 409

Replacing bulbs.................................. 411
Bulbs............................................. 411
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 414
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 416
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 417
Removing wiper blades................. 417
Installing wiper blades .................. 418
Flat tire............................................... 419
Preparing the vehicle .................... 419
Sealing tires with TIREFIT ............. 419
Mounting the spare wheel ............ 423
MOExtended system* ................... 429
Battery ............................................... 431
Disconnecting the battery ............ 432
Removing the battery ................... 433
Charging and reinstalling the
battery .......................................... 433
Reconnecting the battery ............. 434
Jump starting...................................... 435
Towing the vehicle.............................. 437
Installing towing eye bolt .............. 439
Fuses.................................................. 441
Aids for replacing fuses ................ 441
Main fuse box in passenger
compartment ................................ 442
Fuse box in trunk .......................... 442

Contents

Technical data .................................
Parts service......................................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet .....................
Identification labels ...........................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................
CLS 500 .......................................
CLS 55 AMG ................................
Engine................................................
Rims and tires....................................
Same size tires.............................
Mixed size tires ............................
MOExtended tires*.......................
Spare wheel .................................

443
444
445
445
446
447
447
447
448
449
451
453
456
457

Electrical system ................................ 458
Main dimensions ................................ 459
Weights .............................................. 460
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc............ 461
Capacities ..................................... 461
Engine oils .................................... 464
Engine oil additives ....................... 464
Air conditioning refrigerant ........... 464
Brake fluid..................................... 464
Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 465
Gasoline additives......................... 465
Fuel requirements......................... 466
Coolants ....................................... 466
Windshield and headlamp
washer system.............................. 470

Technical terms ............................... 471

Index ................................................. 479

Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will
be performed.

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.

We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.

Service and warranty information

앫

New Car Limited Warranty

Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.

앫

Emission System Warranty

앫

Emission Performance Warranty

앫

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only)

앫

State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)

If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are
important documents and should be kept
with the vehicle.

The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the
period of 18 months from original delivery
of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should be sent to us,
not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
Customer Assistance Center, One
Mercedes Drive, Montvale,
NJ 07645-0350.

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance

Roadside Assistance

Change of address or ownership

The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number

If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.

Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
service. The service advisor will record
each service in the booklet for you.

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.

Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:

Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:

앫

service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,

In the USA:

앫

unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,

앫

gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color.

At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.

Controls in detail

Technical data

Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.

All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.

Getting started

Operation

Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.

Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.

Practical hints
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.

This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.

Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are
designed to help you find information
quickly and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫

this Operator’s Manual

앫

the Maintenance Booklet

Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.

Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
Trademarks:
앫

ESP® is a registered trademark of
DaimlerChrysler.

앫

BabySmartTM is a trademark of
Siemens Automotive Corp.

앫

SIRIUS and related marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc.

The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*

Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.

Warning!

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.

왘

This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.

왘

A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.

컄

Page

!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.

컄컄

This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.

In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
indicate cross-references to
term definitions.

DISPLAY

Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.

i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.

This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.

Introduction
Operating safety

Warning!

Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made
may produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.

Warning!

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage to and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden strong vibration or ride disturbance,
or you suspect that damage to your vehicle
has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down,
and drive with caution to an area which is a
safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.

Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫

the safety precautions in this manual

앫

the “Technical data” section in this
manual

앫

traffic rules and regulations

앫

motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning!

Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.

Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫

for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes

앫

with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee

앫

in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency

앫

for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or

앫

as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.

At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Storage compartments
Door control panel

At a glance
Cockpit

Item

Page

1 Combination switch
앫

Turn signals

앫

Windshield wipers

앫

High beam

2 Steering wheel gearshift
control

Item

Page

7 Lever for voice control system*, see separate
operating instructions
8 Front Parktronic* warning
indicator

f Headlamp washer button*
g Parking brake pedal
242

184
186

9 Overhead control panel
a Glove box lid release, glove
box lock

251
251

3 Cruise control lever

Item

앫

Cruise control

223

b Glove box

앫

Distronic*

226

c Center console

4 Multifunction steering
wheel

26,
148

d Starter switch

5 Instrument cluster

24,
144

e Steering wheel adjustment
stalk

h Hood lock release

Page
191
51, 59
293

j Parking brake release

k Exterior lamp switch

134

l Door control panel

6 Horn

At a glance
Instrument cluster

Item

Page

1 L Left turn signal
indicator lamp
2 v ABS/ESP® warning
lamp

Page

8 Tachometer with:
353

3 Speedometer
4 Multifunction display

147

5 l Distance warning
lamp

357

Vehicles without Distronic*:
Warning lamp without function. It illuminates with the
ignition on. It should go out
when the engine is running.

357

Page

1 Supplemental
Restraint System
(SRS) indicator lamp

359

355

- Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator
lamp

352

± Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, Canada only

360

< Seat belt telltale

358

A High beam headlamp
indicator lamp

138

H Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale*,
Canada only

앫

Selector lever position

앫

Program mode

a Clock with:

7 Coolant temperature indicator with:

Item
ú Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, USA
only

355

b Fuel display with:

9 Main odometer with:

6 K Right turn signal
indicator lamp

• Coolant temperature
warning lamp

Item

49
182

A Fuel reserve warning
lamp

358

c Button for:

162

앫

Resetting trip odometer

146

; Brake warning lamp,
USA only

354

앫

Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination

144

3 Brake warning lamp,
Canada only

354

앫

Confirming new time
settings

162

At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel

Item
1 Multifunction display in
speedometer
Operating control system
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button

147
148

Item
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button

æ up/to increase

j for next display

ç down/to decrease

k for previous display

3 Telephone*:
Press button
s to take a call
to dial a call
t to end a call
to reject an incoming
call

Page

At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part

Item
1 4-zone automatic climate
control

Page

Item

Page

196

6 Opening/closing button for
storage tray or CD changer*, see separate operating
instructions

252

3 Seat heating*, front passenger side

128

7 Rear seat head restraints
switch, folding down

124

Seat ventilation*, front passenger side

130

8 Rear window sunshade
switch*

4 Electronic Stability Program
(ESP®) control switch

2 COMAND system, see separate operating instructions

5 Central locking switch

123

9 Seat heating*, driver’s side
Seat ventilation*, driver’s
side
a Hazard warning flasher
switch
b Front passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp

88
128
130
140
78

At a glance
Center console
Lower part

Item
1 Ashtray

Item

Page

257

6 Vehicle level control switch

239

7 Thumbwheel for setting distance in Distronic*

234

3 Selector lever for automatic
transmission

49,
178

8 Distance warning function*
on/off switch

235

4 Parking assist (Parktronic
system)* deactivation
switch

242

9 Program mode selector
switch for automatic transmission

182

5 Adaptive damping system
(ADS) switch

238

2 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button

Page

At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item

Page

1 Rear interior lighting on/off

141

2 Automatic interior lighting

141

3 Front interior lighting on/off

141

Item

Page

5 Right reading lamp on/off

141

a Hands-free microphones for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone*, and
voice control system* (see
separate operating instructions)

6 Tilt/sliding sunroof

219

b Garage door opener

270

7 Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button

261

c Left reading lamp

141

8 Rear view mirror

191

d Tow-away alarm button (if
equipped)

9 Right reading lamp

141

e Ambient lighting

4 Temperature sensor

95
166

f Interior lighting
g Left reading lamp on/off

141

At a glance
Storage compartments

Item

Page

1 Glove box

251

2 Front passenger seat storage
compartment with first aid kit

398

Item

Page

d Driver’s seat storage compartment

253

e Sun visor card clip

193

f Storage tray or CD changer*

252

g Parcel net in front passenger
footwell

254

6 Door pocket

h Ashtray with cigarette lighter

257

7 Side storage pocket in trunk

j Cup holders

255

k Storage compartment under
the center armrest

252

l Cup holder in the rear center
console

256

m Rear storage compartment in
the rear center console

253

n Cup holder in the rear armrest

257

o Storage compartment in the
rear armrest

253

3 Door pocket
4 Ashtray

258

5 Ruffled storage bag

254

8 Luggage box under the trunk
floor

401

9 Door pocket
a Ruffled storage bag

254

b Ashtray

258

c Door pocket

At a glance
Door control panel

Item
1 Inside door handle
2 Seat adjustment

Page
111
40

3 Memory function (for storing seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel settings)

131

4 Exterior rear view mirror adjustment

5 Switches for opening/closing front and rear side windows, rear window override
switch

214

6 Remote trunk release
switch, Trunk opening/closing system*

113

Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking

Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions.

Unlocking with the SmartKey
Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.

If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment.

SmartKey with remote control

1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk
3 Œ Unlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 83)

왘

Press unlock button Œ on the
SmartKey.
앫

All turn signal lamps flash once.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds once.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄 page 100).

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move up.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

Getting started
Unlocking

왘

The electro-hydraulic brake system is
activated (컄 page 89).

To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the
vehicle, no further than approximately
3 feet (1 meter) away from the door.

Get in the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.

i
Opening a door causes the window on
that door to open slightly. They will return to the up position when the door is
closed.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 98).

Warning!

The locking knobs in the doors
move up.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

i
The electro-hydraulic brake system is
activated (컄 page 89).

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

앫

왘

Get in the vehicle.

i
Opening a door causes the window on
that door to open slightly. They will return to the up position when the door is
closed.

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
왘

With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock and unlock the vehicle without using
the remote control buttons on the
SmartKey and start the engine without inserting the SmartKey in the starter switch.

Pull an outside door handle.
앫

All turn signal lamps flash once.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds once.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄 page 107).

For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 103).

Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions

Warning!

SmartKey

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 352)
3 Starting position

Starter switch

0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position.
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary.

When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except
high beam headlamp indicator lamp
and turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps if activated) should go out when
the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.

i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.

Getting started
Unlocking
!

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

If the SmartKey can still not be turned,
the battery may not be sufficiently
charged.

Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever corresponds
to turning the SmartKey to the various
starter switch positions.

앫

Check the battery and charge it if
necessary (컄 page 433).

앫

Get a jump start (컄 page 435).

To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged
battery, always remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation.
For information on starting the engine using the SmartKey, see “Starting with the
SmartKey” (컄 page 50).

If you firmly depress the brake pedal during pressing KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the engine starts automatically.

i
The function of the SmartKey overrules
the KEYLESS-GO function.

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

1 USA only
2 Canada only
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘

Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.

왘

Do not depress the brake pedal.

Getting started
Unlocking
Position 0

Ignition (or position 2)

Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (as with
SmartKey removed).

왘

If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power
supply is again switched off.

Position 1
왘

Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.

i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
앫

once again, the ignition (position 2)
is switched on.

앫

twice, the power supply is again
switched off.

Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers.
This supplies power to all electrical
consumers. All lamps (except high
beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come
on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster
fails to come on when the ignition is
switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, see “Lamps in instrument cluster” (컄 page 352).

i
When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except
high beam headlamp indicator lamp
and turn signal indicator lamps unless
activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps if activated) should go out when
the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.
For information on starting the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 50).

Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning!

All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.

Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.

Warning!

Seats

Warning!

Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 46).

Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts
provide the best restraint when the wearer
is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the power seats can be operated when the
respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

Warning!

According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats.
Regardless of seating position, children
12 years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant or
toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
For additional information, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 75).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.

Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment

Seat cushion tilt

The seat adjustment switches are located
on the front doors.

The memory function (컄 page 131) lets
you store the settings for the seat position together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.

왘

Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘

1 Seat fore and aft adjustment
2 Backrest tilt
3 Head restraint height
4 Seat height
5 Seat cushion tilt
왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
or

왘

Open the respective door.

Backrest tilt
왘

Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 1.
Adjust a comfortable seating position
that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position
should be as far to the rear as possible,
consistent with ability to properly operate controls.

!
When moving the seat, make sure
there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could
damage the seats.

Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 5 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.

Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 2 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.

Seat height
왘

Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 4.

Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint tilt

Head restraint height
왘

Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 3.

Warning!

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.

For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.

Steering wheel

Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
왘

Push or pull on the lower edge of the
head restraint cushion.

i
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that it is as close to the head as possible.
For more information on seats, see “Seats”
(컄 page 124).

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock your vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the steering wheel adjustment feature can
be operated when the driver’s door is open.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment

Adjusting steering column in or out

Easy-entry/exit feature

The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
located on the steering column (lower left).

왘

This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in
its uppermost position.

Move stalk forward or back in the direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.

Adjusting steering column up or down
왘

1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).
or

왘

Open the driver’s door.

Move stalk up or down in the direction
of arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and that all the displays (incl. malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible.

i
The memory function (컄 page 131) lets
you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.

The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Convenience submenu of the control system (컄 page 168).
Warning!

You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To cancel steering wheel movement, do one
of the following:
앫

Move steering column stalk
(컄 page 42).

앫

Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M
(컄 page 132).

Getting started
Adjusting

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

The last set steering wheel position is
stored when

If the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position,
the steering wheel will no longer be
able to move upward when the
easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

앫

the ignition is switched off

앫

the position is stored in memory
(컄 page 132)

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you:

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you

앫

close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on

or
앫

insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch with the driver’s door closed.

remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch,

앫

open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1

The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted when the engine is started.

Warning!

Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustment must be
completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still
adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors

Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.

Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their
liquid state and by applying plenty of
water.

Warning!

In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.

Interior rear view mirror
왘

Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.

For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 191).

Exterior rear view mirrors
Warning!

Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.

Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Press button 3 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 1
for the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror.

왘

Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left or right according to the desired
setting.

The memory function (컄 page 131) lets
you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.

!
1 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button
2 Adjustment button
3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button

If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from
the front), reposition it by applying firm
pressure until it snaps into place. The
mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror
normally.

At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated
automatically.
For more information, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 192).
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 191).

Getting started
Driving

Warning!

Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedals range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate.

Fastening the seat belts

Warning!

Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 70).

Warning!

Getting started
Driving

Warning!

Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.

Warning!

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning!

Read and observe the additional warning
notices printed in the “Safety and security”
section (컄 page 70).

1 Belt outlet
2 Latch plate
3 Release button
4 Buckle

Getting started
Driving
왘

With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from belt outlet 1.

왘

Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.

Belt outlet height adjustment

앫

Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.

앫

Place the seat backrest in a nearly
upright position.

왘

Push latch plate 2 into buckle 4 until
it clicks.

앫

Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.

왘

If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.

앫

Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

앫

Check your seat belt periodically during travel to make sure that it is properly positioned.

앫

Make sure that the seat belt is always
fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.

1 Release button
왘

Press release button 1 and move the
seat belt height adjuster upward or
downward.

Proper use of seat belts

앫

Do not twist the belt when fastening.

앫

Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm.

Getting started
Driving

Warning!

Starting the engine

Automatic transmission

Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.

Warning!

Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.

Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open.

Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission

P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see the “Controls in
detail” section (컄 page 181).

Getting started
Driving
Starting with the SmartKey
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 60).
왘

Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.

왘

Do not depress the accelerator.

왘

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄 page 36).

i
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.

Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning!

As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
Therefore, never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle.

You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever.
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Locking with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 62).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

1 USA only
2 Canada only
왘

Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.

왘

Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure. Do not depress
accelerator.
The selector lever lock is released.

왘

Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button 1 once.
The engine starts if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.

Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘

If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.

왘

If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
Or:
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.

왘

Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 49). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.

왘

Get a jump start (컄 page 435).

If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘

Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Parking brake

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
injury.
왘

Release the parking brake pedal by
pulling on handle 1.
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.

1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal

Getting started
Driving
Driving
왘

Depress the brake pedal.

왘

Move selector lever to position D or R.

i
Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in
motion.
왘

Release the brake pedal.

왘

Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.

Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.

i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.

!
If you hear a warning signal and the
message Release parking brake
appears in the multifunction display
when driving off, you have forgotten to
release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission engages at a higher revolution. This
allows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
Warning!

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

For more information on driving, see “Driving instructions” (컄 page 279).

!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.

Getting started
Driving
Switching on headlamps

High beam

Low beam headlamps

The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.

Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.

The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

Combination switch
Exterior lamp switch

1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamps come on.

1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
왘

Push combination switch in direction of
arrow 1.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 138).

Combination switch

1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
왘

Press combination switch in direction
of arrow 1 or 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes.
컄컄

For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 134).

Getting started
Driving
컄컄 The

combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movements.

Windshield wipers

Do not operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the wipers with windshield washer fluid (컄 page 55).

The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.

To signal minor directional changes
such as changing lanes, press combination switch only to point of resistance and release. The corresponding
turn signals will flash three times.

Switching on windshield wipers
왘

Combination switch

1 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

Turn the combination switch to the
desired position depending on the
intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
I

Intermittent wiping (interval dependent on wetness of windshield)

II Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed

Getting started
Driving
Intermittent wiping

!
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers
will operate in the presence of water
sprayed on the windshield, and windshield wipers may be damaged as a
result.
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent
on wetness of windshield.
왘

Turn the combination switch to
position I.

After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.

Single wipe

Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
door is opened. This protects persons
getting into or out of the vehicle from
being sprayed.

왘

Intermittent wiping will be continued
when

Wiping with windshield washer fluid

앫

all doors are closed

and
앫

the gear selector lever is in
position D or R
or

앫

the wiper setting is changed using
the combination switch

Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.

왘

Press the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 past the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.

For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 300).

Getting started
Driving
!

앫

Remove blockage.

Problems while driving

If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.

앫

Turn the windshield wipers on
again.

The engine runs erratically and misfires

앫

For safety reasons, stop the vehicle
in a safe location
앫

turn off the engine by turning
the SmartKey to position 0 and
withdraw SmartKey from starter
switch
or

앫

turn off the engine by pressing
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button and open the driver’s
door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with
SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
before attempting to remove
any blockage.

If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in combination switch position I,
앫
앫

set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center

앫

An ignition cable may be damaged.

앫

The engine electronics may not be
operating properly.

앫

Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.

왘

Give very little gas.

왘

Have the problem repaired by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

Getting started
Driving
The coolant temperature is above
248°F (120°C)

If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:

The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.

왘

If no damage can be determined on the

왘

Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool.
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 297).

In case of accident

Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

앫

major assemblies

앫

fuel system

앫

engine mount:

왘

Start the engine in the usual manner.

If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
왘

Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.

왘

Notify local fire and/or police authorities.

Getting started
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!

With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

Warning!

If you have selected the Comfort suspension
tuning (컄 page 238), the vehicle lowers
slightly when it is locked. You should therefore make sure that no one is standing near
the wheel arches or lying underneath the vehicle when it is being locked. Otherwise,
personal injury could result.

Warning!

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫

Keep right foot on brake pedal.

앫

Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

앫

Move the gear selector lever to
position P.

앫

Slowly release brake pedal.

앫

When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.

앫

Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*).

앫

Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
leaving.

!
If you have selected the Comfort suspension tuning Comfort suspension
tuning (컄 page 238), the vehicle lowers
slightly when you lock it within approximately 60 seconds after switching off
the engine. When parking, make sure
that your vehicle cannot come into contact with other objects, such as a curb,
while lowering. Your vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.

Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking brake
Warning!

1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
왘

Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2.
When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious
injury.

Warning!

Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.

Switching off headlamps
왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 53).

For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 134).

Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off engine
왘

Shift the automatic transmission to
position P (컄 page 178).

왘

Apply the parking brake (컄 page 59).

Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*

왘

Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so
that the seat belt and/or latch plate
cannot get caught or pinched in the
door or in the seat mechanism. This
can damage the seat belt and impair
the effectiveness of the seat belt,
and/or cause damage to the door
and/or door trim panel. Such damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

With the driver's door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
(컄 page 36).

i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P
(컄 page 178).
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.
Turning off with the SmartKey
왘
왘

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
(컄 page 36) to position 0.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.

Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄 page 37) to turn off the engine.

Releasing seat belts
왘

Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 47).
Allow the retractor to completely
rewind the seat belt by guiding the
latch plate.

Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Getting started
Parking and locking
Locking
Warning!
Warning!

To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.

A warning sounds and the message
Switch off lamps appears in the
multifunction display if the vehicle’s
exterior lamps are not switched off

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

앫

with the SmartKey removed from
the starter switch and the driver’s
door open

앫

with the engine turned off using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
the driver’s door open (same as
SmartKey removed from the starter
switch.

Switch off the exterior lamps.
왘

Exit the vehicle and close all doors and
the trunk.

Getting started
Parking and locking
Locking with the SmartKey
왘

Locking with KEYLESS-GO*

After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄 page 34).
앫
앫

앫
앫

All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄 page 100).
The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.

For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 98).

왘

After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button 1 at the outside door handle or
on the trunk lid.
앫

All turn signal lamps flash three
times.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄 page 107).

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move down.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.

1 Lock button

For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 103).

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.

The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on
앫

The restraint systems are
앫

Seat belts

앫

Emergency tensioning device

앫

Air bags

앫

Child seats

앫

Child seat recognition

앫

Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH)

As independent systems, their protective
effects work in conjunction with each other.

i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 75).

앫

for about 4 seconds when you turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button once.
for about 4 seconds when you start the
engine by turning the SmartKey or
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button.

i
The 1 indicator lamp comes on and
remains lit if the SmartKey is turned to
position 2 and left there or the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button is
pressed twice. The indicator lamp will
go out when you start the engine.

The restraint systems are fully operational
if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when
the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫

fails to go out after approximately
4 seconds

앫

does not come on at all

앫

comes on after the engine was started
or while driving

For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 359).

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS may not be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system
checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which
could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Improper work on the restraint systems, including incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended air bag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Air bags
Warning!
Warning!

Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal
impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side
impact air bags and head protection window
curtain air bags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags). However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.

To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear your
seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫

Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the seat back컄컄
rest.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄

앫

Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

앫

Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dashboard.

앫

Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front air bag inflates.

앫

Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.

앫

Occupants, especially children, should
never lean their heads in the area of the
door where the side air bag inflates.

This could result in serious injuries or
death should the air bag be triggered.
Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and appropriate size
infant or child restraint system.
앫

Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual.

Warning!

Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact air bags there is a
possibility for a side impact air bag related
injury if occupants, especially children, are
not properly seated or restrained when next
to a side impact air bag which needs to
deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do
its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the side impact air bag be deployed.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and for children 12 years
old and under, use an appropriately
sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have the rear mounted side impact air bags deactivated, then
deactivation can be accomplished upon
your written request to do so at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional
cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.

i
Air bags are designed to activate only
in certain frontal impacts (front
air bags), side impacts (side impact
and head protection window curtain
air bags) which exceed preset thresholds and in certain rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags).
Only during these types of impacts, if of
sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplemental protection.

We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with air bags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important
to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed air bags
and repair any malfunctioning air bags
to make sure the vehicle will continue
to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.

In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, rollovers, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other
accidents, the air bags will not be activated. The driver and the passenger will
then be protected by the fastened seat
belts.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
air bag
Warning!
앫

앫

Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts
installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Air bags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.

앫

Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.

앫

Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.

앫

Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries
when curtain air bag is deployed.

앫

Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.

앫

No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger air bag cover, outboard sides of the front seat
backrests, door trim panels, or door
frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
area between air bags and occupants
free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).

Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.

앫

In addition, through improper work
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag
deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

앫

For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

앫

Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.

When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

Front air bags

Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the front side impact air bags. Contact your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front passenger air bag will only be
deployed if:

1 Driver’s air bag
2 Passenger air bag
Driver and passenger air bags are deployed:
앫

in the event of a frontal impact

앫

if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold

앫

independently of the side impact
air bags

앫

the front passenger seat is occupied

앫

the 75 indicator lamp in
the center console is not lit
(컄 page 78)

앫

the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact air bag on the front passenger
side to deploy in a crash which exceeds
the system’s deployment threshold.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Side impact air bags, window curtain
air bags

1 Front side impact air bags
2 Window curtain air bag
3 Rear side impact air bags

The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed:

Seat belts

앫

on the impacted side of the vehicle

앫

in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold

앫

independently of the front air bags

When the engine is started the seat belt
telltale < illuminates for a maximum of
6 seconds and a warning chime sounds to
remind you and your passengers to fasten
your seat belts.

In addition, the window curtain air bags 2
are deployed:

For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 358)

앫

Always wear your seat belt. All vehicle
occupants always need to have their seat
belts fastened and wear them properly.

in certain vehicle rollovers

The front passenger side air bag will only
deploy if the system senses that the front
passenger seat is occupied.
The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are not deployed in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.

In addition, applicable motor vehicle safety
laws require you to wear seat belts. Even
where this is not the case, we strongly
recommend that all vehicle occupants
have their seat belts fastened and wear
them properly.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belts” (컄 page 46).

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 75).

Warning!

Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.

Warning!

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning!

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.

Warning!

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
and ETD) and side (side impact and window curtain air bags and ETD) impacts
which exceed preset deployment
thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETD).

USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫

Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.

앫

Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver air bag,
passenger front air bag, side impact
air bags, head protection window curtain air bags for side windows), ETD
(seat belt emergency tensioning device),
and front seat knee bolsters.

Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.

앫

Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck
injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal
organs such as your liver or spleen.

앫

Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys etc., as
these might cause injuries.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

앫

Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.

When using a seat belt to secure infant
or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.

Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases:
앫

in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level

앫

in certain vehicle rollovers

앫

if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 64)

i
The ETDs for the front seats will only
activate if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate properly inserted
into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear seats will activate
with or without the respective seat
belts fastened.
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts. Belt force
limiters reduce the force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
Warning!

An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the front or side
impact air bag on the passenger side
and, with the seat belt fastened to secure the object, the ETD to deploy in a
crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold.
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.

Active head restraints
The active head restraints are intended to
offer the driver and front passenger increased protection from head and neck
injury. In the event of a rear-end collision,
the active head restraints on the driver’s
and front passenger’s seats are designed
to move forward in the direction of travel,
providing the head with increased support
earlier on in the collision sequence. The active head restraints move forward whether
the seat is occupied or not.
Warning!

Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the active head restraints may not be able to function properly or offer the intended degree of
protection in the event of an accident.

For information on resetting the activated
active head restraints, see “Resetting activated head restraints” (컄 page 406).

You cannot remove the active head
restraints on the driver’s and passenger’s
seats.
For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!

Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of active head restraint. Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.

Children in the vehicle
Warning!
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫

Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.

앫

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

Infant and child restraint seats and
information on choosing an appropriate
restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Make sure that the infant or child is
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.

Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could
앫

injure themselves on parts of the vehicle

앫

be seriously or fatally injured through
exposure to extreme heat or cold

Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
컄컄

For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 39).

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄

If children open a door, they could
앫

injure other persons

앫

get out of the car and injure themselves
or be injured by following traffic

Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless
they are firmly secured in place. For more information, see “Loading” (컄 page 246) and
“Useful features” (컄 page 251).
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
앫

strong braking maneuvers

앫

sudden changes of direction

앫

an accident

Infant and child restraint systems
Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.

To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
Warning!

Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.

i
Information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages
(컄 page 80).
For information on LATCH-type child
seat mounts (컄 page 81).

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
!

The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories
and all Canadian provinces.

A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.

Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap/shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
top tether anchorage point and a child
restraint lower anchorage system that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and
to infant or child restraints.

Warning!

Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the
vehicle to deactivate the passenger front
air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when
it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
컄컄

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄

Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door
where the side air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the
air bag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.

When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system

1 75 indicator lamp

Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, are
required for use with the BabySmartTM
air bag deactivation system. With the
special child seat properly installed, the
passenger front air bag will not deploy.
The 75 indicator lamp located in the center console will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed or
in starter switch position 0.

i
The system does not deactivate the
side impact air bag, the window curtain
air bag and the emergency tensioning
device.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the 75 indicator lamp
located in the center console comes on for
approximately 6 seconds and then goes
out.

Warning!

The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.

When using a BabySmartTM compatible child
seat on the front passenger seat, the passenger front air bag will not deploy only if
the 75 indicator lamp remains
illuminated.

If the 75 indicator lamp
should not come on or is continuously lit,
the system is not functioning. You must
see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
before seating any child on the passenger
seat.

Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.

Please be sure to check the indicator every
time you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.

More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 362).

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones, electronic tags such as those used
in ski passes and like electronic devices on
the front passenger seat. Signals from such
devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the 75 indicator lamp not to
come on during self-test or be continuously
lit, indicating that the system is not functioning.

Installation of infant and child restraint
systems

왘

This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.

Head restraint must be positioned such
that the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and the top
of the seat back.
Make sure the tether strap is not twisted.

1 Cover

왘

Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.

왘

2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring

Store cover 1 in a convenient place
(e.g. glove box).

왘

Guide tether strap between head restraint and top of the seat back.

Securely fasten the hook 2 to the
anchorage ring 3.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning!

For safety, make sure the hook 2 has
attached to the ring 3 beyond the
safety catch, as illustrated.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Tighten the top tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Child seat anchors – LATCH type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a “LATCH” child seat
with the matching mounting fittings.
The anchors are located behind an upholstery blend.

1 Indicates the position of the anchors
2 Anchors
왘
왘

Lift upholstery blend up to access the
anchors.
Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

i
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.

Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children over 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors 1.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.

Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation
Warning!

Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.

1 Override switch
2 Indicator lamp
왘

Press override switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The rear
door windows can no longer be operated using the switches located in the
rear doors.

!
Operation of the rear door windows
with the switches located on the door
control panel of the driver’s door is still
possible.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

For more information on power windows,
see the “Controls in detail” section
(컄 page 214).

Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate for approximately
2½ minutes.

1 Â button

i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Activating

Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

Deactivating

왘

Canada only:

왘

This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

왘

Press and hold button 1 for at least
1 second.

Press button 1 again.
Insert SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch.

Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 37).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
be inside the vehicle.

Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
앫

ABS (Antilock Brake System)

앫

BAS (Brake Assist System)

앫

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

앫

Electro-hydraulic brake system
Warning!

The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
앫

Excessive speed, especially in turns

앫

Wet and slippery road surfaces

앫

Following another vehicle too closely

The ABS, BAS, ESP® and electro-hydraulic
brake system cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

i
In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the
ESP® and electro-hydraulic brake system is only achieved with winter tires
(컄 page 336) or snow chains as required.

ABS

Warning!

Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even with light brake pressure.

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
The - malfunction warning lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.

The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashes
whenever the ABS is activated which can
be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take
extra care while driving.

Braking
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster dial flashes. Because of
the electro-hydraulic brake system, you
will not feel any pulsation in the brake pedal.
왘

Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal.

Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.

Emergency brake maneuver
왘

Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.

Warning!

When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS
and the ESP® are also switched off.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the braking distance.

Warning!

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.

For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 353).

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing the braking distance.
왘

Apply continuous full braking pressure
until the emergency braking situation is
over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.

When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
Warning!

If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without
the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.

The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.

ESP®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)
monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP® works
to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially useful while driving off and on wet or
slippery road surfaces.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP®
is engaged.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Warning!

Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashing in
the instrument cluster. In this case proceed
as follows:
앫

While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.

앫

While driving, ease up on the accelerator.

앫

Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.

Warning!

The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.

For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 353) and
(컄 page 368).

!
The ESP® will only function properly if
you use wheels of the recommended
tire size (컄 page 449).

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP®

!
®

Turn on the ESP immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.

Warning!

The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in driving
maneuvers.

When you switch off the ESP®
앫

the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle

앫

the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip

앫

the traction control will still brake a
spinning wheel

앫

the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking

앫

you cannot activate Distronic*

ESP®

Do not switch off the
when a Minispare or collapsible tire is mounted.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
앫

when driving with snow chains

앫

in deep snow

앫

in sand or gravel

The switch is located on the center console.

i
When the ESP® is switched off and one
or more drive wheels are spinning, the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
speedometer flashes. However, the
ESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle.

1 ESP® switch
왘

Press ESP® switch 1 until the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP® is deactivated.

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Warning!

When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.

!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP®
switched off. This may cause serious
damage to the drivetrain which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

Switching on the ESP®
왘

Press ESP® button 1.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in
the instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with ESP® switched on.

Electro-hydraulic brake system
The electro-hydraulic brake system combines a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically controlled brake servo
assistance. You have increased braking
safety and improved braking comfort.
Warning!

Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
in the speedometer display, for example by
the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
warning lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 354). Also read and observe the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 363).

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Warning!

The electro-hydraulic brake system requires
electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 354) and
warning messages in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 363) come on while driving. To
brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and
depress the pedal much further to obtain
the expected braking effect. If necessary,
apply full pressure to the brake pedal.
Brakes may only be applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!

The electro-hydraulic brake system is automatically activated when you
앫

unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or the KEYLESS-GO*

앫

open the driver’s or passenger door

앫

turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1

앫

in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press
the start/stop button on the gear
selector lever once

앫

depress the brake pedal

앫

release the parking brake

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

i
If the electro-hydraulic brake system is
activated as the brake pedal is first depressed, you may feel a reduced pedal
resistance and longer pedal travel than
normal. When releasing the pedal, you
may also feel the brake pedal pulsate
and you may hear a sound which is
caused by the activation of the
electro-hydraulic brake system pump.
This is normal and not an indication of
a malfunction. Pedal travel returns to
normal when you release the brake
pedal and the sound soon ceases.
If you experience the above while driving and the red brake warning lamp
(컄 page 354) illuminates and/or warning messages appear in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 363), the brake system
is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions of the warning message(s) and
have the brake system checked immediately.

Warning!

Have brake pad replacement and other work
on the electro-hydraulic brake system carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for further information. The electro-hydraulic brake system must be deactivated prior
to working on the system. High pressure is
intermittently built up in the system as part
of its automatic self-test. In addition, the
system is automatically activated when the
vehicle is unlocked by SmartKey, when the
driver or passenger door is opened, when
the starter switch is turned to position 1,
when the brake pedal is depressed or when
the parking brake is released. Failure to deactivate the system prior to maintenance
will cause brake pistons to extend and brake
fluid to leak, which may result in injuries
(contusions and acid burns). Extended
brake pistons may also cause injury.

The electro-hydraulic brake servo assistance switches off automatically
앫

approximately 2 minutes after you
turned the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or removed the
SmartKey

앫

approximately 2 minutes after you
pressed the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button to turn off the engine or power
supply and opened the driver’s door
(with driver’s door open, the starter
switch is set to position 0, same as
SmartKey removed from starter
switch)

앫

approximately 20 seconds after you
locked the vehicle from outside

Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Note on driving with the
electro-hydraulic brake system
앫

Following extended periods of only
minor loads to your brake system, you
should occasionally apply the brakes
when traveling at high speeds. This
improves the grip of the brake pads.
Warning!

Be very careful not to endanger other road
users when you apply the brakes.
앫

After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This
produces heat which serves to dry the
brake disks and help prevent corrosion.

앫

On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
and to reduce brake wear.

앫

After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes faster.

앫

Only Mercedes-Benz approved components (e.g. brake pads) should be
installed on your vehicle. Brake pads
not approved by Mercedes-Benz may
impair the safety of your vehicle.

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer

Deactivating

Anti-theft alarm system

The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.

With the SmartKey

Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens

왘

Activating
With the SmartKey
왘

Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.

With KEYLESS-GO*
왘

Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.
The engine is turned off.

왘

Open the driver’s door.

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 (컄 page 36).

앫

a door

With KEYLESS-GO*

앫

the trunk

왘

앫

the hood

Start the engine by means of the
start/stop button on the gear selector
lever.

i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫

someone attempts to raise the vehicle
(only vehicles with tow-away alarm)

앫

the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key

앫

someone opens a door from the inside

앫

someone opens the trunk with the
emergency release button

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Arming the alarm system

If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system (컄 page 261) provided
Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.

The indicator lamp located in the central
locking switch in the center console.

왘

Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that the alarm system is
armed. The indicator lamp 1 begins to
flash after approximately 30 seconds
after arming the alarm system.

i
If the turn signal lamps do not flash
three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:
1 Indicator lamp

앫

a door

앫

the trunk

Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming the alarm system
왘

Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash once to
indicate that the alarm system is
disarmed.

i
The alarm system will rearm automatically after approximately 40 seconds if
neither a door nor the trunk was
opened.

Canceling the alarm

Tow-away alarm

With the SmartKey

Depending on vehicle production date, the
vehicle may not be equipped with the
tow-away alarm.

왘

Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.

or
왘

Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is canceled.

With KEYLESS-GO*
왘

Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.

or
왘

Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.

i
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response
Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system (컄 page 261), provided
that the Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and
that necessary cellular service and GPS
coverage are available.

Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is canceled.

Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the tow-away alarm
왘

Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*.

The button is located on the overhead control panel.

Disarming the tow-away alarm

Exit and lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) an lock button at each
outside door handle.

1 Tow-away alarm off button
왘

Switch off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch.

i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
when the ignition is switched on.

Press button 1.
The indicator lamp in the button comes
on briefly.

왘

The tow-away alarm is automatically
armed after about 30 seconds.

To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm
before towing the vehicle, or when parking
on a surface subject to movement, such as
a ferry or auto train.

왘

When you unlock the vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms automatically.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed
until you lock the vehicle again.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
4-zone automatic climate control
Power windows
Power tilt /sliding sunroof
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed on your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.

For more information on locking and unlocking, see “Getting started” (컄 page 34)
and (컄 page 60).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key. The locking
tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
distinguish each key unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks

앫

the doors

앫

the trunk

앫

the fuel filler flap

SmartKey with remote control

1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for the trunk
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 Œ Unlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 83)

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a looked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

i
When you open a door, the side window
on that side lowers slightly. Once you
close the door, the window moves up
again.

If the battery is discharged or the side
windows are covered with ice, the side
windows will not move up or down. In
this case, you will not be able to close
the door. Do not try to close the door
with force. The door or the window
could otherwise be damaged.

USA only:

!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.

This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Factory setting

Canada only:

The electro-hydraulic brake system is
activated (컄 page 89).

Global unlocking

This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

100

왘

i
You can also open and close the power
windows (컄 page 214) and tilt/sliding
sunroof (컄 page 219) using the
SmartKey.

Press button Œ.
앫

All turn signal lamps flash once.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move up.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if:
앫

neither a door nor the trunk is opened

앫

the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch

앫

the central unlocking switch is not activated

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking

Selective setting

Global unlocking

왘

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.

왘

Press button ‹.
앫

All turn signal lamps flash three
times.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature activated).

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move down.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.

왘

Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:

Press button Œ twice.
앫

All turn signal lamps flash once.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move up.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘

Press button Œ once.
앫

All turn signal lamps flash once.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).

앫

The locking knob in the driver’s
door moves up.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

101

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking

Checking the batteries

왘

If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then either
the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.

왘

Press button ‹.
앫

All turn signal lamps flash three
times.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature activated).

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move down.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.

Restoring to factory setting
왘

Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.

앫

Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order.

Check the batteries in the
SmartKey (컄 page 102) and replace them if necessary
(컄 page 408).

Use the mechanical key to unlock
the driver’s door (컄 page 402) and
the trunk (컄 page 121).

Replace the batteries (컄 page 408).

앫

Use the mechanical key to lock the
driver’s door (컄 page 402) and the
trunk (컄 page 121).

앫

Have the vehicle batteries and their
connections checked.

If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

102

Press button ‹ or Œ.

If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.

You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

i
If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
the vehicle accordingly.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking and opening the trunk

You can unlock and open the trunk separately.

If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it.

A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
왘

Press and hold button Š until trunk
lid unlocks and begins to open.

i
If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 121).

!
The trunk lid swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*: to stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the
SmartKey. The trunk lid stops moving.
The trunk can also be opened from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency release” (컄 page 120).

To confirm locking, all turn signal lamps
flash three times.
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
each with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit.

왘

Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.

왘

Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.

왘

If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.

The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you pull an outside
door handle.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
앫

the doors

앫

the trunk

앫

the fuel filler flap

103

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

When any outside door handle other
than the driver’s outside door handle is
pulled, the vehicle is centrally unlocked.

When you open a door, the side window
on that side lowers slightly. Once you
close the door, the window moves up
again.

Warning!
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for the trunk
3 Mechanical key locking tab
4 Œ Unlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 83)

When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a looked door from the inside, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

!
If the battery is discharged or the side
windows are covered with ice, the side
windows will not move up or down. In
this case, you will not be able to close
the door. Do not try to close the door
with force. The door or the window
could otherwise be damaged.

!
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.

104

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

USA only:

Canada only:

This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:

This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:

You can also open and close the power
windows (컄 page 214) and tilt/sliding
sunroof (컄 page 219) using the
SmartKey.

(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

i
When you unlock the vehicle, the
electro-hydraulic brake system is activated (컄 page 89).
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
앫

You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄 page 98).

앫

You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with the ‹ button).

앫

Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.

105

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫

Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
앫

electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO

앫

metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil

앫

This does not apply if, after starting, the
selector lever is still in position P and
then the SmartKey is inserted in the
starter switch. The SmartKey will then
have priority over the KEYLESS-GO
function and the vehicle’s electrical
system will operate according to the
position of the SmartKey in the starter
switch, even stopping the engine.

Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
앫

앫

To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or
the trunk lid.
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
앫

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.

앫

All the doors must be closed.

앫

The brake pedal must be firmly
depressed. Do not depress the
accelerator.

106

If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 38), you can only turn it off
again with this button, even if you have
put the SmartKey in the starter switch
in the meantime.

앫

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
The vehicle cannot be locked or the
engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.

앫

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
removed from the vehicle while the
ignition is switched on (e.g. if passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO), the message
Key not recognized will appear in the
multifunction display while driving off.
Find the SmartKey or change its
present location immediately (e.g.
place it on the front passenger seat or
insert it in shirt pocket).

앫

Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, the message
Key still in vehicle will appear in
the multifunction display.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting

Selective setting

왘

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you pull the driver’s
door handle only the driver’s door and the
fuel filler flap unlocks.

Pull an outside door handle.

Press lock button on an outside door
handle (컄 page 62) or trunk lid
(컄 page 109).

앫

All turn signal lamps flash once.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).

All turn signal lamps flash three
times.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature activated).

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move down.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.

Global unlocking
왘

Global locking

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move up.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds if:
앫

neither a door nor the trunk is opened

앫

the central locking switch is not activated.

왘

Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:

107

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘

Global unlocking

Global locking

왘

Pull the driver’s outside door handle.

Pull any outside door handle other than
the driver’s door handle.

Press the lock button at outside door
handle (컄 page 62).

앫

All turn signal lamps flash once.

앫

All turn signal lamps flash once.

앫

An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).

앫

An acoustic signal sounds once (if
equipped and feature activated).

All turn signal lamps flash three
times.

앫

The locking knob in the driver’s
door moves up.

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move up.

An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature activated).

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move down.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.

Restoring to factory setting
왘

108

Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 6 seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!

Checking the batteries

If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, then the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is
drained.

왘

앫

Check the batteries in the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(컄 page 109) and replace them if
necessary (컄 page 408).

앫

Use the mechanical key to unlock
the driver’s door (컄 page 402) and
the trunk (컄 page 121).

앫

Use the mechanical key to lock the
driver’s door (컄 page 402) and the
trunk (컄 page 121).

앫

Have the vehicle battery checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order.

!
If battery check lamp 5 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.

Global locking using the lock button at
trunk lid

i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.

Replace the batteries (컄 page 408).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

i
If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
the vehicle accordingly.

1 Lock button

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
malfunctioning, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

109

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘

Press lock button 1 at trunk lid.
앫
앫

All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
An acoustic signal sounds three
times (if equipped and feature activated).

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move down.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.

Unlocking and opening the trunk (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
You can unlock and open the trunk separately.
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
The handle is located in the rear license
plate recess.

Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*: to stop the opening procedure, press button Š on the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. The trunk
lid stops moving.

If the trunk does not open, it is still
locked separately (컄 page 121).

If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked with KEYLESS-GO, the trunk will
lock automatically after closing it.

To confirm locking, all turn signal lamps
flash three times.
왘

110

The trunk lid swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance.

You can also lock the vehicle using the
lock button at outside door handle
(컄 page 107) or KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch (컄 page 118).

Pull on the handle
or

왘

Press and hold button Š until the
trunk unlocks and opens.

If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked with KEYLESS-GO, the trunk will
lock automatically after closing it.
To confirm locking, all turn signal lamps
flash three times.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
If you lose your SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, you should do the following:
왘

Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

왘

Report the loss immediately to your car
insurance company.

왘

Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.

Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.

i
If the vehicle has previously been
locked using the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replacement.

앫

Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.

앫

Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.

In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle

앫

Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 37).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be inside the vehicle.

앫

Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the
vehicle.

111

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk

Pull on door handle 2 on the respective front door to open door.

Opening the trunk from the outside

If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.

A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.

The trunk lid swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance.

Front doors
왘

Rear doors
왘

Pull up locking knob 1 on the
respective rear door to unlock door.

왘

Pull on door handle 2 on the
respective rear door to open door.

The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.

i
The trunk can also be opened using the
button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* or from
its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk
emergency release” (컄 page 120).

i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
왘

Pull on the handle.
The trunk opens.

112

To confirm locking, all turn signal lamps
flash three times.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk from the inside

You can open the trunk from the inside if
the vehicle is stationary.

The trunk lid swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there
is sufficient overhead clearance.

A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.

Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*: To stop the opening procedure, press or pull remote trunk lid
switch 1.

The switch is located on the driver’s door.

1 Remote trunk lid switch with indicator
lamp (vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*)
왘

1 Remote trunk lid switch with indicator
lamp

Pull remote trunk lid switch 1 until the
trunk begins to open.
The trunk opens. The indicator lamp in
the switch comes on and remains lit
until the trunk is closed.

i
The trunk can also be opened using the
button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* or from
its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk
emergency release” (컄 page 120).

113

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk
Warning!
Closing the trunk from the inside
automatically*
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk from the inside using the remote trunk lid switch.
왘

Press remote trunk lid switch
(컄 page 113) until the indicator lamp in
the switch goes out and the trunk is
closed.

To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘

Release the remote trunk lid switch.

i
You can also close the trunk by hand.

114

Warning!

Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
the door mounted switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure that no
one is in danger of being injured.

Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk lid switch.

If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.

Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk
lid switch can be operated. Therefore, do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
manually

Warning!

To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk. Be especially careful when small children are
around.

1 Handle
2 Handles
왘

Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handle 1 or handles 2.

왘

Close trunk with hands placed flat on
trunk lid.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

Warning!

i
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.

i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it (컄 page 114).
To confirm locking, all turn signal lamps
flash three times.

Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

115

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk separately
from the outside using the trunk closing
switch.

왘

Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.

i
You can also close the trunk by hand.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.

1 Trunk closing switch

116

Warning!

Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
앫

press the trunk closing switch 1

앫

press the Š button on the SmartKey

앫

press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
driver’s door)

Even with the SmartKey removed from the
vehicle, the trunk closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Warning!

Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

Closing the trunk from the outside
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* you can close the trunk separately
from the outside using the trunk closing
switch.

i
You can also close the trunk lid by
hand.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk reopens slightly.

Do not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.

To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.

If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it (컄 page 114).
To confirm locking, all turn signal lamps
flash three times.

1 Trunk closing switch
왘

Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.

왘

Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.

117

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Warning!

press the trunk closing switch 1

앫

press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch

앫

press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO

앫

press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
driver’s door)

Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

Warning!

In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system* and KEYLESS-GO, you can close the
trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously
from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch.

Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after closing it (컄 page 114).
To confirm locking, all turn signal lamps
flash three times.

118

Closing the trunk and locking the
vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*)

1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
You can close the trunk and lock the
vehicle simultaneously.
왘

Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘

Press switch 1 briefly.
앫

All turn signal lamps flash three
times.

앫

The locking knobs in the doors
move down.

앫

The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.

i
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open automatically if
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.

Warning!

press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch 1

앫

press the trunk closing switch

앫

press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO

앫

press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
driver’s door)

Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
removed from the vehicle, the KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch can be operated.
Therefore do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

Warning!

Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

119

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Trunk emergency release

With the emergency release button, the
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.

The emergency release button unlocks
and opens the trunk while the vehicle is
standing still or in motion.

If the vehicle has previously been
locked using the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*, the exterior lamps will
flash and the alarm will sound as the
trunk opens.

The emergency release button is located
on the inside of the trunk lid.

Illumination of the emergency release button:
앫

The button will flash for 30 minutes
after opening the trunk.

앫

The button will flash for 60 minutes
after closing the trunk.

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫

Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.

앫

Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.

i
1 Emergency release button
왘

The emergency release button does
not open the trunk, if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.

In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
앫

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the
vehicle.

Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
The trunk unlocks and opens.

Pull an outside door handle.

앫

Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 37).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be inside the vehicle.

120

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Valet locking

The lock is located next to the handle
above the rear license plate recess.

왘

Insert the mechanical key into trunk lid
lock.

왘

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 to lock the trunk.

To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk, e.g. when you valet
park the vehicle, lock it separately with
the mechanical key. Leave only the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* less its mechanical key
with the vehicle.

The trunk remains locked even when
the vehicle is centrally unlocked.

i
You can only cancel the separate trunk
locking mode by means of the
mechanical key.
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
왘

Close the trunk (컄 page 114).

왘

Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 402).

왘

Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1 to unlock the trunk.
You can now open the trunk
(컄 page 112).

121

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.

i
The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
앫

is pushed or towed

앫

is on a test stand

122

For more information on towing the vehicle, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 437).
You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system
(컄 page 168).

Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from inside using the central locking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if
you want to lock the vehicle before starting
to drive.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or
unlocked with the central locking switch.
Warning!

Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
The switch is located in the center console.

Unlocking
왘

Press upper half 1 of the central locking switch.
The vehicle unlocks.

i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
Central locking switch

1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Locking
왘

Press lower half 2 of the central locking switch.
If all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.

If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch
앫

while in the selective remote control mode, only the front door
opened from the inside is unlocked.

앫

while in the global remote control
mode, the vehicle is unlocked completely when a front door is opened
from the inside.

123

Controls in detail
Seats
For more information on seat adjustment,
see the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 40).

For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Front seat active head restraint

Warning!

You cannot remove the active head restraints on the driver’s and passenger’s
seats.

For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.

For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 39).
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 74).

Rear seat head restraints

i
The rear seat head restraints cannot be
adjusted.
Folding head restraints back
The rear seat head restraints can be folded
backward for increased visibility.

Adjust head restraints so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

124

1 Head restraint release switch

Controls in detail
Seats
왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Press the symbol-side on rocker
switch 1 to release the head restraints.

Placing head restraints upright

Lumbar support
The curvature of the driver's seat can be
adjusted to help enhance lower back support and seating comfort.

The head restraints will fold backward.
Warning!

For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.

왘

Pull the head restraint forward until it
locks into position.

!
Make sure the head restraints engage
when placing them upright. Otherwise
their protective function cannot be assured.

1 Adjustment lever
왘

Move adjustment lever 1 in the direction of arrows until you have reached a
comfortable seating position.

125

Controls in detail
Seats
Seat cushion depth

Multicontour seat*

왘

The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the right
side of the seat after turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch to position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
twice.

Backrest contour
왘

Adjust the contour of the backrest to
the desired position using æ or
ç.

1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest side bolster adjustment

왘

Move the backrest support to the bottom by using button 2 or to the center
by using button 3.

왘

Backrest side bolsters

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

126

Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg using
switch 1.

Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 4.

Controls in detail
Seats
Multicontour features

Drive-Dynamic seat* with multicontour features

Seat cushion depth
The Drive-Dynamic seat automatically adjusts the lateral support provided by the
backrest to your driving style.
The Drive-Dynamic seat electronically
controls the air pressure in the air chambers of the backrest side bolsters. This
function improves driving comfort and
pleasure.
In addition, the Drive-Dynamic seat has a
movable seat cushion and inflatable air
cushions built into the backrest to provide
additional lumbar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches right side of
the seat on the driver side, or the left side
of the seat on the passenger side after
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button twice.

왘

Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg using
switch 6.

Backrest contour
왘

1 Activate drive dynamic function
2 Backrest side bolsters
3 Massage function
4 Backrest center
5 Backrest bottom
6 Seat cushion depth

Move the backrest support to the bottom by using button 5 or to the center
by using button 4.

왘

Adjust the contour of the backrest to
the desired position using æ or
ç.

왘

Backrest side bolsters

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 2.

127

Controls in detail
Seats
Drive-dynamic features
Activating
왘

Deactivating
왘

Press button 1 (컄 page 127) again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.

Press button 1 (컄 page 127).
The indicator lamp in the button comes
on and the following display appears in
the multi-function display for about
5 seconds.

Seat heating*
Both switches for the front seats are located in the center console. The red indicator
lamps in the switch come on to show
which heating level you have selected.

When the engine is turned off, the last
cushion setting is retained in memory.
The cushion is automatically adjusted
to this setting when the engine is restarted.
Massage function (PULSE)

i
You can adjust the characteristics of
the Drive-Dynamic seat using the control system (컄 page 170).

The massage function can help prevent
muscle tension during long drives.
왘

Press button 3 (컄 page 127).
The indicator lamp in button 3 comes
on. The air cushions in the lumbar area
pulsate.

i
The massage function turns off
automatically after approximately
5 minutes.

128

1 Front seat heating switch
왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

Controls in detail
Seats

Level
3

Three indicator lamps on
(highest level)

Switching seat heating on

왘

If one or more of the lamps on the seat
heating switch are flashing, there is
insufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heating switches off automatically.

One or more red indicator lamps on the
switch show the selected heating level.

The seat heating automatically
switches to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
2

Two indicator lamps on
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 1 after approximately 10 minutes.

Press switch 1 repeatedly until the
desired heating level is set.

Switching seat heating off
왘

Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
indicator lamps go out.

The seat heating will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

One indicator lamp on (lowest
level)
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately
20 minutes.

off

No indicator lamp on

129

Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation*
The switch is located on the center console. Seat ventilation can be activated
manually with the ignition on, or by the
summer opening feature (컄 page 217).

The blue indicator lamps on the switch
show the ventilation level selected:
Level
3
2

Two indicator lamps on

One indicator lamp on (lowest
level)

off
왘

Three indicator lamps on
(highest level)

No indicator lamp on

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

Switching seat ventilation on
1 Seat ventilation switch

왘

Press button 1 repeatedly until the
desired ventilation level is set.

i
The seat ventilation is automatically set
to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature (컄 page 217).

130

Switching seat ventilation off
왘

Press button 1 repeatedly until all
indicator lamps go out.

i
If one or all of the lamps flash on the
seat ventilation switch, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical
consumers being switched on. The seat
ventilation switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

Controls in detail
Memory function
왔 Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver
should check and adjust the seat height,
seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper
height. See also the section on air bags
(컄 page 65) for more information on proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision.

With the memory function you can store up
to three different settings.
The following settings are stored when
using the buttons on the driver’s door:
앫

Driver’s seat, backrest and head
restraint position

The following settings are stored when
using the buttons on the front passenger
door:
앫

Front passenger seat, backrest and
head restraint position

앫

Settings for multicontour seat*

앫

Settings for multicontour seat*

앫

Steering wheel position

Warning!

앫

Exterior rear view mirror position

Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.

Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

131

Controls in detail
Memory function
The memory button and stored position
buttons are located on the door.

Memory button

1, 2, 3

Stored position button

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

or
왘

Open the respective door.

132

Storing positions into memory
왘

Adjust the seats to the desired position
(컄 page 40).

왘

Adjust the steering wheel (컄 page 42)
and exterior rear view mirrors
(컄 page 44) on the driver’s side to the
desired position.

왘

Press memory button M.

왘

Release memory button M and press
position button 1, 2 or 3 within
3 seconds.
All the settings are stored to the selected position.

Recalling positions from memory

!
Do not operate the power seats using
the memory button if the seat backrest
is in an excessively reclined position.
Doing so could cause damage to front
or rear seats.
왘

Press and hold memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors
have completely moved to the stored
positions.

i
Releasing the memory position button
stops movement to the stored positions immediately.

Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position

왘

Stop the vehicle.

왘

Press memory button M 3.

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.

왘

Press button 1.

Within 3 seconds, press bottom of adjustment button 2.

For information on activating the parking
position, see “Activating exterior rear view
mirror parking position” (컄 page 192).

The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
왘

Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.

The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.

i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored,
you can move the mirror again.

1 Passenger side, exterior rear view mirror
2 Adjustment button
3 Memory button

133

Controls in detail
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 53)
and see “Turn signals” (컄 page 53).

Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

B Low beam headlamps (or high
beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward)
and parking lamps.
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
Exterior lamp switch

i
Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon* headlamps: The active Bi-Xenon
headlamps monitor your steering angle
and driving speed, then automatically
shift their beams to either side to better follow the curvature of the road
ahead, increasing usable illumination
over conventional headlamps.

134

C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only:
When engine is running, the low
beam is also switched on.

M Off
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 136)
U Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 136)

‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
† Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp

Controls in detail
Lighting

i
With the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the engine turned off
with KEYLESS-GO* and the driver’s
door open a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are
switched on.
The message Switch off lamps
appears in the multifunction display.
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and the parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light:
앫

Low beam headlamps

앫

Tail and parking lamps

앫

License plate lamps

앫

Side marker lamps

Warning!

If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫

앫

the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright
ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.

To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
times.
왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U.

With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button once, only the parking lamps will
switch on and off automatically.
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the
license plate lamps, and the side marker
lamps will switch on and off automatically.

135

Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode

Canada only:

USA only:

왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.

The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.

When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are automatically
switched on.

When the engine is running, and you shift
from a driving position to position N or P,
the low beam headlamps will switch off
with a three-minute delay.

By default, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system,
see “Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)” (컄 page 164).

In low ambient light conditions the
parking lamps will also switch on:
앫

Tail and parking lamps

앫

License plate lamps

앫

Side marker lamps

For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.

i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the exterior lamp switch
in position M, the high beam headlamps cannot be switched on.
The high beam flasher is available at all
times.

136

When the engine is running, and you
앫

turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps
switch on additionally.

앫

turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 53).

When the engine is running, and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 53).
Locator lighting and night security illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the “Control system” section, see (컄 page 165) and
(컄 page 166).

Controls in detail
Lighting
Fog lamps
Warning!

In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.

Front fog lamps

Fog lamps cannot be switched on with
the exterior lamp switch in
position U. For switching on the fog
lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.

왘

Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 53).

왘

Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps are switched on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 134).

왘

Push in the exterior lamp switch.

The front fog lamps are switched off.

Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.

The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.

137

Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘

Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 53).

왘

Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.

Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.

High beam
왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B or U (컄 page 134).

왘

Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to switch on the high
beam.

The rear fog lamp is switched on.

The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 24).

The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 134).
왘

왘

Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The rear fog lamp is switched off.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.

Combination switch

Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.

1 High beam
2 High beam flasher

The front fog lamps remain lit.
High beam flasher
왘

138

Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.

Controls in detail
Lighting
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
(CLS with Bi-Xenon* headlamps)
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps improve illumination of the road onto which
you are turning.

앫

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
will come on automatically depending
on the steering angle, even if you did
not switch on either turn signal.
If the corner-illuminating front fog
lamps came on automatically, they will
also go out automatically depending on
the steering angle.

the exterior lamp switch in
position B (컄 page 134)

Driving forward

Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps

the exterior lamp switch in
position U (컄 page 134)
or

앫

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only come on in low ambient lighting
conditions.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
function is not available at a vehicle
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with
앫

the daytime running lamp mode
activated (컄 page 136)

왘

Depending on wether you are turning
left or right, switch on the left or right
turn signal (컄 page 53).
The respective front fog lamp comes on
and illuminates the road onto which
you are turning.

Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The combination switch for the turn signal
resets automatically after major steering
wheel movements. This will switch off the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
where activated by switching on the left or
right turn signal.
If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and corner-illuminating front fog lamps can be switched
off by returning the combination switch to
its original position.

139

Controls in detail
Lighting
Driving rearward

Hazard warning flasher

Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps

The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle.

왘

Place the gear selector lever in
position R.
The inverse front fog lamp comes on
automatically depending on the steering direction and steering angle.

Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
왘

Switching on hazard warning flasher
왘

All turn signals are flashing.

i
With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the
respective left or right turn signals will
operate when the ignition is switched
on.

The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the center console.

Place the gear selector lever out of
position R.

Press the hazard warning flasher
switch 1.

Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘

The respective front fog lamp goes out.

Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.

1 Hazard warning flasher switch

140

If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard
warning flasher switch 1 once to
switch off.

Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting in the front

The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.

!
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the
ON position for extended periods of
time with the engine turned off could
result in a discharged battery.

1 Left front reading lamp on/off
2 Rear interior lighting on/off
3 Automatic control on/off
4 Front interior lighting on/off
5 Right front reading lamp on/off
6 Ambient lighting
7 Interior lighting
8 Right front reading lamp
9 Left front reading lamp

Activating automatic control
왘

Press switch 3.
The interior lighting switches on in
darkness, when you:
앫

unlock the vehicle

앫

remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch

Deactivating automatic control

앫

open a door

왘

Press switch 3.

앫

open the trunk

The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you:

The interior lighting switches off after a
preset time (컄 page 167).

앫

unlock the vehicle

앫

remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch

앫

open a door

If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after
approximately 5 minutes.

앫

open the trunk

An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.

141

Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control

Interior lighting in the rear

Switching front/rear interior lighting on
and off

The overhead control panel is located
above the rear seat bench.

왘

Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 4 or 2 to switch on the
desired interior light.

왘

Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 4 or 2 again to switch off the
respective interior light.

왘

Press front reading lamp
switch 1 or 5 to switch on the
desired front reading lamp.

왘

Press front reading lamp
switch 1 or 5 again to switch off the
respective front reading lamp.

142

왘

Press desired rear reading lamp
switch 3 to switch on the corresponding rear reading lamp.

왘

Press respective rear reading lamp
switch 3 again to switch off the corresponding rear reading lamp.

Ambient lighting
왘

Switching front reading lamps on and off
The front reading lamps are located in lower edge of the interior rear view mirror.

Rear reading lamps

1 Ambient lighting switch, to brighten
2 Rear reading lamp
3 Rear reading lamp on/off
4 Rear interior lamp
5 Ambient lighting
6 Ambient lighting switch, to dim

Press ambient lighting switch 1 or 6
repeatedly until ambient lighting 5
has reached the desired intensity.

You can switch the ambient lighting on and
off, using the Control system
(컄 page 166).

Controls in detail
Lighting
Door entry lamps

Trunk lamp

For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps will switch on
in darkness when you open a door and the
automatic control is activated.

The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
opened.

The door entry lamps will switch off when
the corresponding door is closed.

i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the
headlamps, the door entry lamps will
remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.

If the trunk remains open, the trunk lighting switches off automatically after approximately 10 minutes.

i
The interior lighting is factory-set to automatic mode (컄 page 141).
The setting selected for the interior
lighting is used for the trunk lighting as
well.

143

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “At a glance” (컄 page 24).

Warning!

No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.

1 Reset button
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫

open a door

앫

switch on the ignition

앫

press the reset button 1

앫

switch on the exterior lamps

You can modify the instrument cluster settings in the instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄 page 160).

144

If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Instrument cluster illumination
Use the reset button (컄 page 24) to adjust
the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster.

i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
To brighten illumination
왘

Turn the reset button in the instrument
cluster clockwise (컄 page 24).
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.

Warning!
앫

To dim illumination
왘

Turn the reset button in the instrument
cluster counterclockwise (컄 page 24).
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.

Coolant temperature indicator

앫

Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.

Excessive coolant temperature triggers
the coolant temperature warning lamp
(컄 page 357) and a warning in the
multifunction display (컄 page 379).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i
During severe operating conditions,
e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise close to 248°F
(120°C).

145

Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Trip odometer
Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display (컄 page 147).
왘

If it is not displayed, press the è or
ÿ repeatedly until the trip odometer appears.

왘

Press and hold the reset button on the
instrument cluster (컄 page 24) until
the trip odometer is reset.

Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.

!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.

146

Outside temperature indicator

Warning!

The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

The outside temperature is displayed in
the instrument cluster (컄 page 24).

The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.

Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in
position 1. The control system enables you
to:
앫

call up information about your vehicle

앫

change vehicle settings.

For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the multifunction display, and
much more.

i
The displays for the audio systems (radio, CD player) will appear in English,
regardless of the language selected.

Warning!

Multifunction display

A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

1 Outside temperature
2 Trip odometer
3 Automatic transmission program mode
4 Main odometer
5 Current gear selector lever position

The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.

Above illustration shows the standard
display.
For more information on menus displayed
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄 page 150).

147

Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system
(컄 page 147) are controlled by the buttons
on the multifunction steering wheel.

1 Multifunction display in the speedometer
Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume:
Press button
æ up/to increase
ç down/to decrease
3 Telephone*:
Press button
s to take a call
t to end a call
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display

148

Depending on the selected menu
(컄 page 151), pressing the buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel will alter what
is shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under Audio, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.

Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
앫

앫

If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.

In the Settings menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For
instructions on using these submenus, see
the “Settings menu” section (컄 page 157).

The menus are described on the following
pages.

The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.

149

Controls in detail
Control system
Menus

150

This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.

The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.

Controls in detail
Control system

Commands/submenus

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1

Menu 2

Menu 3

Menu 4

Menu 5

Standard display

AUDIO

NAV*

Distronic*

Vehicle status message memory1

(컄 page 153)

(컄 page 155)

(컄 page 156)

Digital speedometer

Select radio station

Call up settings

Call up maintenance
system display

Select satellite radio
station*

Show route guidance
instructions, current
direction traveled

Call up vehicle malfunction, warning and system
status messages stored
in memory

Checking tire inflation
pressure

Operate CD player

Check engine oil level

The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.

151

Controls in detail

Commands/submenus

Control system
Menu 6

Menu 7

Menu 8

Settings

Trip computer

Telephone

(컄 page 157)

(컄 page 171)

(컄 page 172)

Reset to factory settings

Fuel consumption statistics after start

Load phone book

Instrument cluster submenu

Fuel consumption statistics since the last Search for name in phone book
reset

Time/Date submenu

Distance to empty

Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
Convenience submenu
Dynamic seat* submenu

i
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.

152

Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu

AUDIO menu

왘

The functions in the Audio menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.

Press button k or j repeatedly
to select the functions in the standard
display menu.

The following functions are available:
Function

Page

Call up digital speedometer

153

Call up maintenance display

339

Checking tire inflation pressure

313

Check engine oil level

295

Display digital speedometer
왘

Press button k or j repeatedly
until the digital speedometer appears
in the multifunction display.

Select radio station

If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO off is shown in the
multifunction display.

왘

Turn on COMAND and select radio.
Refer to separate COMAND operating
instructions.

왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display.

The following functions are available:
Function

Page

Select radio station

153

Select satellite radio station*

154

Operate CD player

154

1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
왘

Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.

153

Controls in detail
Control system

왘

You can only store new stations using
the corresponding feature on the radio,
see separate operating instructions.

Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.

Select satellite radio station*
(USA only)

Additional optional satellite radio
equipment and a subscription to satellite radio service provider are required
for satellite radio operation. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details and availability for your vehicle.

The satellite radio is treated as a radio
application.

For more information, refer to separate
COMAND operating instructions.

You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.

왘

Select SAT radio with the corresponding softkey in the radio menu.

1 SAT mode and preset number
2 Setting for station selection using
memory
3 Channel name or number

154

1 Current CD (CD 1 through CD 6 for
CD changer*)
2 Current track
왘

Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.

i
Operate the CD player
왘

Turn on COMAND and select the CD
player. Refer to separate COMAND
operating instructions.

왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the multifunction display.

To select a CD from the magazine,
press a number on the COMAND
system key pad located in the center
console.

Controls in detail
Control system
NAV* menu

Distronic* menu

The NAVmenu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system.

Use the Distronic menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system.
What information is shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the
Distronic system is active or inactive.

왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the message NAV in the
multifunction display.

앫

If COMAND is switched off, the message NAV off is shown in the multifunction display.

앫

With COMAND switched on but route
guidance not activated, the direction of
travel and, if available, the name of the
street currently traveled on appear in
the multifunction display.

앫

With COMAND switched on and route
guidance activated, the direction of
travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction display.

Distronic deactivated
When Distronic is deactivated, you will see
the standard display in the multifunction
display.

Please refer to the “Driving systems”
section of this manual (컄 page 226) for
instructions on how to activate Distronic.
왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following two
pictures in the multifunction display.

1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function

Please refer to the COMAND manual for
instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system.

155

Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic activated
With Distronic activated, the Distronic
display is shown in the multifunction display and one or two segments around the
set speed are illuminated in the speedometer.

1 Distronic activated
Vehicle status message memory menu
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.

156

The vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if there are any messages
stored.
Warning!

Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 363).
왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display.

Vehicle status messages have been
recorded
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction
display:

왘

Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have
occurred. For malfunction and warning
messages, see “Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display”
(컄 page 363).

Controls in detail
Control system
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction display when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.

Settings menu
In the Settings menu there are two functions:
앫

i
The vehicle status message memory
will be cleared when you turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2. You will then only see
high priority messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 363).

앫

왘

The function To reset: Press reset
button for 3 seconds, with which you
can reset all the settings to the original
factory settings.
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings menu is seen in the
multifunction display.

Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.
왘

Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) for approximately 3 seconds.
In the multifunction display you will see
the request to press the reset button
again to confirm.

왘

Press the reset button again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.

157

Controls in detail
Control system

Submenus in the Settings menu

The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. After approximately five seconds,
the Settings menu reappears in the
multifunction display.

왘

Press button j.
In the multifunction display you see the
collection of the submenus.

For safety reasons, the Lamp circuit
headlamp function in the Lighting submenu is not reset while driving.
왘

Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.

158

The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use the j button to access
the individual functions within that submenu. Once within the submenu, you can
use the button j to move to the next
function or the button k to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.

Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE

LIGHTING

Select temperature display mode

Synchronizing the
time

Select speedometer display mode
Select language

CONVENIENCE

DYNAMIC SEAT*

Set daytime running Set automatic
lamp mode
locking
(USA only)

Activate
easy-entry/exit
feature

Set level for dynamic seat, driver

Set time (hours)

Set locator lighting

Set parking position Set level for dynamfor exterior rear
ic seat, passenger
view mirror

Set time (minutes)

Ambient lighting

Select display (speed dis- Set date (month)
play or outside temperature) for status line

Exterior lamps delayed shut-off

Select display (speed dis- Set date (day)
play or outside temperature) for basic display

Interior lighting
delayed shut-off

VEHICLE

Set date (year)

159

Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting speedometer display mode

Selecting language

Access the Instr. cluster submenu via
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. cluster submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings. The following
functions are available:

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Display unit
Speed-/odometer in the multifunction
display.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Language in the
multifunction display.

Function

Page

Select speedometer display
mode

160

Select language

160

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

Select display (speed display or 161
outside temperature) for status
display
Select display (speed display or 161
outside temperature) for basic
display

160

왘

Press button æ or ç to set
speedometer unit to km or miles.

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

Controls in detail
Control system
왘

Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the multifunction display messages.

Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for status display

Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for basic display

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Status line display in
the multifunction display.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Basic display in the
multifunction display.

Available languages:
앫

German (Deutsch)

앫

English (English)

앫

French (Français)

앫

Italian (Italiano)

앫

Spanish (Español)

앫

Dutch (Nederlands)

앫

Danish (Dansk)

앫

Swedish (Svenska)

앫

Portuguese (Português)

앫

Turkish (Türkçe)

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

Press button æ or ç to select
the status line to Speed or Outside
temp.

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

Press button æ or ç to select
the display permanently shown in the
multifunction display.

i
You will see the status indicator when
you have called up a different display
from the standard display.

161

Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu

Synchronizing the time

Set time (hours)

Access the Time/Date submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date submenu to change the time and date display
settings. The following functions are available:

This function can only be seen on vehicles
with COMAND and navigation module*.

This function can only be seen when time
synchronization is switched off.

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time/Date
submenu.

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time/Date
submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Time sync. with head
unit in the multifunction display.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Clock, hours in the
multifunction display.

Function

Page

Synchronizing the time

162

Set time (hours)

162

Set time (minutes)

163

Set date (month)

163

Set date (day)

163

Set date (year)

164

The selection marker is on the hour setting.

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

i
Information on setting the time, refer to
separate COMAND instructions.

162

왘

Press button æ or ç to select
the desired setting.

왘

Press button æ or ç to set the
hour.

왘

Confirm by pressing reset button
(컄 page 24).

Controls in detail
Control system
Set time (minutes)

Set date (month)

Set date (day)

This function can only be seen when time
synchronization is switched off.

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time/Date
submenu.

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time/Date
submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Set date month in the
multifunction display.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Set date day in the
multifunction display.

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time/Date
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Clock, minutes in the
multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the month
setting.

The selection marker is on the day
setting.

The selection marker is on the minute
setting.

왘
왘

Press button æ or ç to set the
minutes.

왘

Confirm by pressing reset button
(컄 page 24).

Press button æ or ç to set the
month.

왘

Press button æ or ç to set the
day.

163

Controls in detail
Control system
Set date (year)

Lighting submenu

왘

Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Time/Date
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Set date year in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the year
setting.

왘

Press button æ or ç to set the
year.

164

Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)

to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:
Function

This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp
mode is mandatory and therefore in a
constant mode.

Page

Set daytime running lamp mode 164
(USA only)
Setting locator lighting

165

Setting ambient lighting

166

Setting night security illumination

166

Setting interior lighting delayed
shut-off

167

왘

Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Lamp circuit headlamp in
the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

Controls in detail
Control system
왘

Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (constant).

With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch at
position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫

Parking lamps

앫

Tail lamps

앫

License plate lamps

앫

Side marker lamps

For more information on the daytime
running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 134).

Setting locator lighting

For safety reasons, resetting the
Lighting submenu to factory settings
while driving (컄 page 157) will not
deactivate the daytime running lamp
mode.

With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*:

The following message appears in the
multifunction display: Cannot be completely reset to factory settings
while driving.

앫

Parking lamps

앫

Tail lamps

앫

License plate lamps

앫

Side marker lamps

앫

Front fog lamps

The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.
왘

Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
컄컄

165

Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Function Surround
lighting in the multifunction display.

왘

Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.

The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Ambient light Level in
the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function on.

왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is activated.

왘

Press button æ or ç to select
the desired brightness of the ambient
lighting.

Setting ambient lighting

The setting 1 represents the darkest
level and setting 5 the brightest level.

Use this function to adjust the brightness
of the ambient lighting.

The ambient light is switched off at setting 0.

166

Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off)
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting
the vehicle and closing all doors.
With the delayed shut-off feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U before the engine is turned
off, the following lamps will switch on
when the engine is turned off.
앫

Parking lamps

앫

Tail lamps

앫

License plate lamps

앫

Side marker lamps

앫

Front fog lamps

If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door or do not close an opened
door, the lamps will automatically switch
off after 60 seconds.

Controls in detail
Control system
왘

왘

Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Headlamps delayed
shut-off in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is activated.
You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature:
왘

왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the
engine.

Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
Then turn it to position 2 and back to
position 0.
The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.

Press button æ or ç to switch
Headlamps delayed shut-off on or
off.

Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain lit during
darkness for 10 seconds after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘

Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Interior lighting delayed shut-off in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
컄컄

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘

Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear selector lever
(컄 page 37).

167

Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄

왘

Press button æ or ç to switch
Interior lighting delayed shut-off
on or off.

Vehicle submenu
Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available:
Function

Page

Set automatic locking

168

Setting automatic locking

Convenience submenu

Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).

Access the Convenience submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features. The following
functions are available:

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Automatic door lock in
the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

168

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the Vehicle
submenu.

Press button æ or ç to switch
Automatic door lock on or off.

Function

Page

Activate easy-entry/exit feature 168
Set parking position for exterior 169
rear view mirror
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄 page 42).

Controls in detail
Control system

Warning!

You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.

왘

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the
Convenience submenu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Function Easy-entry
feature in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

To cancel steering wheel movement, do one
of the following:
앫

Move steering column stalk
(컄 page 42).

앫

Press one of the memory position buttons or the memory button M
(컄 page 132).

Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Use the Mirror adjustment parking aid
function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear R is engaged. For
additional information, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 192).
왘

Move the selection marker to the
Convenience submenu using the æ

or ç button.
왘
왘

Press button æ or ç to switch
Function Easy-entry feature on or
off.

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Mirror adjustment parking aid in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
컄컄

169

Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄

Adjusting the dynamic seat

The following settings are available:

The function dynamic seat adjustment lets
you determine the way the seat adjusts
while driving.

Weak

(Comfort) Less lateral support and slow air pressure
build-up in the air chambers of the backrest side
bolsters

Powerful

(Sporty) Strong lateral support and fast air pressure
build-up in the air chambers of the backrest side
bolsters

왘
왘

Press button æ or ç to switch
function on or off.

왘

Dynamic seat* submenu
Access the Dynamic seat submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Dynamic seat
submenu to change the settings for the
dynamic seats. The following functions are
available:
Function

Page

Adjust driver seat

170

Adjust passenger seat

170

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Dyn. multi-cont. seat,
driver for the driver seat or
Dyn. multi-cont. seat, fr. pass.

for the passenger seat in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

왘

170

Move the selection marker with the
æ or ç button to the
Dynamic seat submenu.

Press button æ or ç to switch
function to Weak or Powerful.

Controls in detail
Control system
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Function

Page

Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset

171

1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start

Distance to empty

172

Fuel consumption since last reset

Fuel consumption statistics after 171
start

왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see After reset in the
multifunction display.

Fuel consumption statistics after start
왘

왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see After start in the
multifunction display.

1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset

i
All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately
4 hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.

171

Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics

Distance to empty

왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the multifunction display.

왘

Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 24) until
the value is reset to 0.

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see Range: in the multifunction display.
In the multifunction display you will see
the calculated range based on the current fuel tank level.

TEL menu*

Warning!

A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

172

Controls in detail
Control system

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.

You can use the functions in the Tel menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘

Switch on the telephone and COMAND.

왘

Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the Tel menu in the multifunction display.

Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your
telephone is switched on or off:
앫

If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: PHONE off.

앫

If the telephone is on:

Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the multifunction display you will then see
the message:

The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the multifunction display is empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY appears in the multifunction display.

왘

Press button s.
You have answered the call. In the multifunction display you see the length of
the call.

i
If you do not wish to accept a call,
press button t.
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can
operate it using the control system.

173

Controls in detail
Control system
Ending a call
왘

Press button t.
You have ended the call. In the multifunction display you will again see the
standby message.

Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the Tel menu in the
multifunction display.

174

왘

Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
multifunction display you will see the
message Please wait.
When the message Please wait disappears, the phone book has been loaded.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical
order.

i
If you press and hold j or k for
longer than 1 second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing t.

Controls in detail
Control system
왘

Press button s.

Redialing

The system dials the selected phone
number.

The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.

앫

If the connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the multifunction display.

왘

Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the Tel menu in the multifunction display.

왘

Press button s.
In the multifunction display you see the
first number in the redial memory.

앫

If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.

왘

Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.

왘

Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.

175

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an
automatic transmission see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 49).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.

Warning!

The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
앫

the gear selector lever
position D (컄 page 178) with
gear ranges (컄 page 181)

앫

the selected program mode:
(C/S) (컄 page 182)
or

If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its shift program.

(M/C/S) (CLS 55 AMG only)
(컄 page 187)
앫

the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 180)

앫

the vehicle speed

i
During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission

176

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!

An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate.

Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.

The indicators come on when you activate
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or
opening a door) and go out after approximately 15 minutes.
Warning!
1 Current gear range/gear selector lever
position
2 Current program mode
The current gear range/gear selector lever
position and program mode (C/S) or
(M/C/S) appear in the multifunction
display.

Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.

It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by:
앫

limiting the gear range

앫

changing gears manually

177

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever position
Effect

ì Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.

Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector lever
is locked in position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P
(컄 page 404).

í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.

Effect

ë Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage N while
driving.
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to N
only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.

178

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning!

Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not
intended to or capable of preventing your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 51).

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could move the gear selector lever from
position P, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

179

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘

Driving tips

The transmission shifts up again.

Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle
More throttle

Earlier upshifting
Later upshifting

Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘

Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.

180

Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.

Stopping
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
왘

Leave the transmission in gear.

왘

Hold the vehicle with the brake.

When you stop longer with the engine
idling and/or on a hill:

Maneuvering
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
왘

Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.

왘

Accelerate gently.

왘

Never abruptly step on the accelerator.

Working on the vehicle

왘

Set the parking brake.

Warning!

왘

Move the gear selector lever to
position P.

When working on the vehicle, set the
parking brake and move gear selector lever
to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could
roll away.

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in position D
and driving in the automatic shift
program C or S (컄 page 182), you can
select a gear range for the automatic
transmission to operate within:
Gear selector lever (컄 page 183):
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the gear selector lever to the right (D+).
Steering wheel gearshift control
(컄 page 184):
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the respective downshift button on the
steering wheel gearshift control, and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the respective upshift button on the
steering wheel gearshift control.

The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 177). If you
press on the accelerator when the engine
has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit
selected.
Effect

ï The transmission shifts through
sixth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).

î The transmission shifts through
fifth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only).

é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.

Effect

è The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.

ç The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving
앫

on steep downgrades

앫

in mountainous regions

앫

under extreme operating
conditions

æ The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.

181

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic shift program

The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.

Never change the program mode when
the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.

왘

Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
the desired shift program appears in
the multifunction display.
Select C for comfort driving:
앫

The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.

앫

Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.

앫

Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.

i
The last selected program
mode (C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted.

1 Program mode selector switch
C Comfort

For comfort driving

S Sport

For standard driving

The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (C/S) are
indicated in the multifunction display
(컄 page 177).

182

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission, you
can change the gears manually and limit or
extend the gear range for automatic
shifting with the gear selector lever in
position D and driving in the automatic
program mode C or S.

Downshifting
Warning!

Upshifting

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.

!
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drivetrain which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

왘

Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.

The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Canceling gear range limit

왘

Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.

The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear as permitted by
the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄 page 181).

i
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the gear selector lever is moved to
the D- direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.

왘

Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the multifunction display.

The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘

Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.

The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This may
involve shifting down one or more gears.

183

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting
The steering wheel gearshift control provides an alternative method for changing
the gears manually and limiting or extending the gear range for automatic shifting
with the gear selector lever in position D
and driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.

i
For information on using the steering
wheel gearshift control in manual program mode M (CLS 55 AMG only), see
“Manual shift program” (컄 page 187).

i
To avoid overrevving the engine when
downshifting with steering wheel
gearshift buttons, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.

The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
located to the left and right of the steering
wheel.

184

Steering wheel gearshift control
CLS 500*

1 Button, outside: upshift
2 Button, inside: downshift

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘

i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
The last selected program
mode (C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted.
Downshifting

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.

Canceling gear range limit
왘

Press and hold the outside 1 of one of
the buttons on the steering wheel
until D reappears in the multifunction
display.

The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously limits
the gear range of the transmission
(컄 page 181).

The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.

Upshifting

Shifting into optimal gear range

왘

Warning!

Briefly press the inside 2 of one of the
buttons on the steering wheel.

Briefly press the outside 1 of one of
the buttons on the steering wheel.

The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program.
This action simultaneously extends the
gear range of the transmission.

왘

Press and hold the inside 2 of one of
the buttons on the steering wheel.

The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.

185

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Steering wheel gearshift control
CLS 55 AMG
The steering wheel gearshift buttons are
located to the left and right of the steering
wheel.

i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.

Warning!

The last selected program
mode (C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted in the automatic
program mode.

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.

The following instructions describe operation of the steering wheel gearshift control
when driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.
1 Right button: upshift
2 Left button: downshift

186

Downshifting

For instructions on operating the steering
wheel gearshift control and gear selector
lever in the manual program mode M, see
“Manual shift program CLS 55 AMG”
(컄 page 187).

왘

Briefly press button 2 on the left side
of the steering wheel.

The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously limits
the gear range of the transmission
(컄 page 181) when you are driving in the
automatic program mode (C or S).

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Upshifting

Canceling gear range limit

왘

Briefly press button 1 on the right
side of the steering wheel.

The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmission
when you are driving in the automatic
program mode (C or S).

Press and hold button 1 on the right
side of the steering wheel until D
reappears in the multifunction display.

The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘

Press and hold button 2 on the left
side of the steering wheel.

The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This may
involve shifting down one or more gears.

Manual shift program CLS 55 AMG
In addition to the automatic shift
program C or S, your vehicle is equipped
with the manual shift program M.
In the manual program mode M,
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
is switched off and you need to change the
gears by manually upshifting or downshifting using the steering wheel gearshift buttons to the left and right of the steering
wheel (컄 page 186) or the gear selector
lever.

187

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
!
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature
has been reached.

The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.

Shift into reverse gear R or parking
position P only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
serious damage to the drive train which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

188

The current gear selector lever position
and the selected program mode (M/C/S)
are indicated in the multifunction display
(컄 page 177).

For information on automatic program
modes C or S, see “Automatic shift
program” (컄 page 182), “Gear selector
lever one-touch gearshifting”
(컄 page 183), and “Steering wheel
gearshift control one-touch gearshifting” (컄 page 184).
1 Program mode selector switch
M Manual

For manual gear shifting

C Comfort

For comfort driving

S Sport

For standard driving

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Activating manual shift program
왘

Press program mode selector
switch 1 repeatedly until the M for
manual program mode M appears in
the multifunction display.
The transmission switches to the
manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range
is not limited.

You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in position D. You
can upshift or downshift through the gears
in succession.

Upshifting

!
In the manual program mode M, the
transmission will not upshift, even if
the engine has reached its overrevving
range. Shift up to the next gear before
the engine has reached its overrevving
range. Make absolutely certain that the
engine speed does not reach the red
marking on the tachometer
(컄 page 24). Otherwise the engine
could be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

왘

Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.

or
왘

Briefly press button 1 on the right
side of the steering wheel
(컄 page 186).
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
If, instead of the manual program mode
symbol M, the p symbol appears in
the multifunction display (컄 page 177),
shift to the next higher gear. The fuel
supply will otherwise be interrupted to
prevent the engine from overrevving.

The manual program mode M will not
be stored. When the engine is turned
off with the manual program mode M
selected, the transmission will go to
the automatic program mode (C or S)
when the engine is restarted.

189

Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Downshifting
Warning!

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘

When you brake or stop, the transmission shifts down to a gear from which
you can easily accelerate or take off.
Kickdown
Using the kickdown when driving in the
manual program mode M is not possible.

왘

or
왘

Briefly press button 2 on the left side
of the steering wheel (컄 page 186).
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.

Stop the vehicle.

왘

Move gear selector lever to P.

왘

Turn off the engine.

왘

Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.

왘

Restart the engine.

왘

The transmission will go to the
automatic program mode (C or S).

Move gear selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.

왘

Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

Press the program mode selector
switch (컄 page 188) repeatedly until
C or S appears in the multifunction
display.

or
왘

The manual program mode M is not
stored.

190

If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
gear and reverse gear can be selected.
왘

Deactivating manual shift program
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.

Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)

Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
For information on windshield wipers, see
“Windshield wipers” (컄 page 54).
Headlamp cleaning system*
The button is located on the left side of the
dashboard.

Rear view mirrors

The headlamps are cleaned automatically if:
앫

앫

For more information on setting the rear
view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 44).

the lights are switched on
and

Auto-dimming mirrors

the windscreen is wiped with windscreen washer fluid fifteen times

The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when

If the ignition is switched off, the automatic headlamp cleaning mode is reset
and counting is resumed from 0.

앫

the ignition is switched on
and

For more information on filling up the
washer reservoir, see the “Operation” section (컄 page 300).

앫

incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view mirror.

1 Headlamp washer button

The rear view mirrors will not react if

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

앫

reverse gear is engaged

왘

Press button 1.

앫

the interior lighting is turned on

The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.

191

Controls in detail
Good visibility

Warning!

The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the rear window sunshade* is in raised position.
Glare can endanger you and others.

Warning!

In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape from the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.

192

!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.

Warning!

Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.

Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.

1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button

Controls in detail
Good visibility
왘

Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 133).

앫

immediately once you exceed a vehicle
speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)

왘

Make sure the Mirror adjustment
parking aid function in the Convenience submenu of the control system
is switched to on (컄 page 169).

앫

immediately when you press button 1
for driver’s side mirror.

Sun visors

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.

왘

Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.

Warning!

The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
앫

10 seconds after you put the gear
selector lever out of position R

The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.

Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
왘

Swing sun visors 1 down when you
experience glare.

1 Sun visor
2 Mirror cover
3 Mirror lamp
4 Mounting
5 Vanity mirror
왘

To use the vanity mirror 5, lift up the
mirror cover 2.
Make sure the sun visor is properly
engaged in the mounting 4.
Lamp 3 switches on.

193

Controls in detail
Good visibility
If sunlight enters through a side window:

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Disengage sun visor 1 from
mounting 4.

왘

Press switch 1 briefly to raise the sunshade.

Pivot sun visor to the side.

왘

i
If sun visor 1 is disengaged from
mounting 4 with mirror cover 2
open, mirror lamp 3 will switch off.

Press switch 1 briefly to lower the
sunshade.

Always raise the sunshade fully for its support against the window frame.
Warning!

Rear window sunshade*
The switch is located in the center console.

When operating the rear window sunshade,
be sure that there is no danger of anyone
being harmed by the raising or lowering procedure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be
immediately halted by briefly pressing
switch 1. To reverse direction of movement, press switch 1 again.

1 Rear window sunshade switch

194

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated
after approximately 6 to 20 minutes of
operation depending on the outside temperature.
Warning!

Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
왘

Activating

왘

If the rear window defroster switches
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts flashing, this means that too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
the rear window defroster.

Press button F (컄 page 195) or
button 1 (컄 page 199) on the
respective climate control panel.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.

Deactivating
왘

Press button F (컄 page 195) or
button 1 (컄 page 199) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the rear window defroster
automatically turns itself back on.

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

195

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control

196

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
1 Left side defroster vent, fixed
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
5 Right center air vent, adjustable
6 Right side defroster vent, fixed
7 Right side air vent, adjustable
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side air vent
9 Climate control panel
a Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side air vent
b Left side air vent, adjustable

197

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control

Canada only

1 Air distribution, left

7 Air distribution, right

c Climate control on/off

2 Front defroster

d Decrease air volume

3 Temperature rocker switch, left

8 Air distribution and air volume, right
(automatic, manual)

4 Display

9 AC cooling on/off

f Air recirculation

5 Temperature rocker switch, right

a Rear air-conditioning remote control

6 Rear window defroster

b Increase air volume

g Air distribution and air volume, left
(automatic, manual)

198

e Residual heat/ventilation

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control

USA only

1 Air distribution, left

7 Air distribution, right

c Climate control on/off

2 Front defroster

d Decrease air volume

3 Temperature rocker switch, left

8 Air distribution and air volume, right
(automatic, manual)

4 Display

9 AC cooling on/off

5 Temperature rocker switch, right

a Rear air-conditioning remote control

f Air distribution and air volume, left
(automatic, manual)

6 Rear window defroster

b Increase air volume

e Air recirculation

199

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control

Warning!

When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature).
This may cause burn or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
using the air distribution controls
(컄 page 199) to direct the air away from the
air vents.

200

The climate control is a 4-zone intelligent
climate control system. Your vehicle interior is divided into 4 zones.

With the help of a sun sensor, the climate
control determines the relation of the sun
to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
the inside temperature for every individual
zone.
You can set the temperature for each of
the 4 zones separately.
The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It cools the vehicle’s interior according to the angle and
intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside temperature and the selected temperature.
You can operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual
mode.

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode (컄 page 209) is
deactivated.
Warning!

Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.

i
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the
filter before its scheduled interval. A
clogged filter will reduce the air volume
to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off, see
“Summer opening feature”
(컄 page 217). The climate control will
then adjust the interior temperature to
the set value much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window.

Deactivating the climate control
system
Deactivating
왘

Press button ´ (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199) until the display 4
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) is
cleared.
The climate control system is deactivated.

Warning!

When the climate control is switched off, the
outside air supply and circulation are also
switched off. Only choose this setting for a
short time. Otherwise the windows could
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering
you and others.

201

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Reactivating
왘

Make sure the ignition is switched on.

왘

Press button ´ (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199) again.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.

i
To switch the system on, you can also
press another button, with the exception of 1 or F and T
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199).

Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Press one button U (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199).

When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can
be switched off if necessary.

i
The automatic climate control system
can also be switched on or off
separately for the left and right sides of
the passenger compartment, as
required.

202

Activating

The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. AUTO appears in the
display 4 (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199). The air volume and air
distribution are adjusted automatically.
왘

Use temperature controls 1 and 6
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) to separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
The temperature of the vehicle interior
is adjusted automatically.

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Deactivating
왘

Press button or Q
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. AUTO disappears in the display 4
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199). The automatic operation of air volume switches off.

or
왘

Turn air distribution controls 1
and 7 (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199)
on each side of the passenger compartment to the desired symbol.
The indicator lamps on the
buttons U go out. AUTO disappears
in the display 4 (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199). The automatic operation
of air distribution switches off.

Setting the temperature
Use temperature control rocker
switches 3 and 5 (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
The adjusted temperature appears in the
display 4 (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199).
The climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible.

i
You can also adjust the temperature in
the rear passenger compartment
(컄 page 210).

Increasing
왘

Push top of temperature control rocker
switch 3 and/or 5 (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199).
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

Decreasing
왘

Push bottom of temperature control
rocker switch 3 and/or 5
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199).
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.

203

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution

왘

Use the air distribution controls 1 and 7
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of
the passenger compartment.

The indicator lamps on the
buttons U go out. The automatic air
distribution is switched off. The air distribution is controlled according to the
selected control setting.

The following symbols are located on the
controls:
Symbol

Function

Directs air through the cockpit, center, side and rear passenger compartment air vents

Directs air to the windshield
and through the side air vents

Directs air into the entire vehicle interior

Directs air to the footwells

204

Turn air distribution controls 1
and 7 (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199)
on each side of the passenger compartment to the desired symbol.

Closing the center air vents
왘

The side air vents 2 and 5 are
closed.
Opening the side air vents
왘

i
You can also turn the air distribution
control to a position between two symbols.
Opening the center air vents
왘

Turn thumbwheels 3 and 4
(컄 page 196) upward.
The side air vents 2 and 5 are open.

Turn thumbwheels 3 and 4
(컄 page 196) downward.

Turn thumbwheels 8 and a
(컄 page 196) upward.
The side air vents 7 and b are open.

Closing the side air vents
왘

Turn thumbwheels 8 and a
(컄 page 196) downward.
The side air vents 7 and b are
closed.

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Adjusting air volume

Front defroster

Use buttons U (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199) for automatic mode or air
volume buttons or Q
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) to adjust air
volume manually.

You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.

Nine blower speeds are available.
왘

Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are
clear again.

Press button to decrease or
button Q to increase air volume to
the desired level.
The indicator lamps on the
buttons U go out. AUTO disappears
in the display 4 (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199) and the automatic mode
is switched off. The selected blower
speed is shown in the display 4.

The air conditioning switches
automatically to the following functions:

Activating
왘

Press button P or 0
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. Display 4 (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199) is cleared.

앫

cooling on to dehumidify

앫

maximum blowing and heating
power (depends on cooling
temperature)

앫

air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows

앫

the air recirculation mode is
switched off

Deactivating
왘

Press button P or 0
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.

i
The cooling remains switched on.

205

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Windshield fogged on the outside

i
Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
왘
왘

Switch windshield wipers on
(컄 page 54).
Press button U (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. AUTO appears in the
display 4 (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199). The air volume and air
distribution are adjusted automatically.

If the automatic mode of the climate control is switched off:
왘

Turn air distribution control 1 and 7
to a or Y (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199).

206

Maximum cooling MAX COOL

Air recirculation mode

If the left and right air distribution controls
as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
cooling, the display “MAX COOL” appears
in the front and rear display.

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.

This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof are closed).

Warning!

Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 209) is activated, or
press button 0.

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Activating
왘

Press button , (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.

i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside temperatures and if the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) and nitrogen oxide
in the outside air increases, for example in a tunnel.
The indicator lamp on button , is
not lit when the air recirculation mode
is automatically switched on.
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.

Warning!

Never operate the side windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility
of anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger:

i
Press and hold button , for approximately 2 seconds. The side windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof* will close. You
can release button , once the closing procedure has begun. The windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof* continue closing until they are fully closed.

Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof: The closing of the side windows can be immediately
halted by pressing or pulling the respective
window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by
moving the switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof in any direction.
The closing of the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding the , button.

207

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Deactivating

왘

Press and hold button , for approximately 2 seconds. The side windows
and or tilt/sliding sunroof* will return
to their previous position. You can release button , once the opening
procedure has begun. The windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof* or tilt/sliding
panel* continue opening until they
have reached their previous position.

Press button , (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.

i
The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:
앫

after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below
approximately 41°F (5°C)

앫

after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off

앫

after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately
41°F (5°C)

208

A window or tilt/sliding sunroof* will
only return to its previous position if it
has not been moved to another position using the respective window
switch or tilt/sliding sunroof* switch
after it was closed with button ,.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof* that
has been moved will remain in its current position if button , is used to
re-open the remaining windows or
tilt/sliding sunroof*.

Combination filter with
pollutant-sensitive air-recirculation
mode
The combination filter reduces pollutants
and unpleasant odors in the outside air.
The pollutant-sensitive air-recirculation
mode automatically switches off the
supply of outside air when pollutants are
detected in the air.

i
The pollutant-sensitive air-recirculation
mode is not possible if you have
switched off the air conditioning or if
the temperature falls below 41°F
(5°C).

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehicle interior down to the selected temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thus preventing the windows from fogging
up.

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

If the air conditioning cannot be turned
on again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself off.

Press button 2 (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199).

Have the air conditioning checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

왘

The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The cooling function switches off
after a short delay.

i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.

Warning!

If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.

Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘

Press button 2 (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199) again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.

Residual heat and ventilation
(Canada only)
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.

i
If you switch on the residual heat
function when temperatures are high,
only the ventilation will be switched on.

209

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control

Deactivating

Regardless of the selected air volume,
the blower operates at low speed.

왘

i
How long the system will provide heating depends on
앫

the coolant temperature

앫

the temperature set by the operator

The blower will run at speed setting 1
regardless of the air distribution
control setting.
Activating
왘

Switch off the ignition.

왘

Press button T (컄 page 198).
REST in the display 4 (컄 page 198)
comes on.

210

Press button T (컄 page 198) again.
REST in the display 4 (컄 page 198)
goes out.

i
The residual heat is automatically
turned off:
앫

when the ignition is switched on

앫

after about 30 minutes

앫

if the battery voltage drops

앫

if the coolant temperature is too
low

Rear air conditioning
The rear climate control is adjusted via the
front climate control panel (컄 page 198) or
(컄 page 199) or the rear climate control
panel.
The rear climate control panel is located in
the rear center console.

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable

Setting the temperature

2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable

Use temperature control rocker
switches 4 and 6 to separately adjust
the air temperature on each side of the
rear passenger compartment.

3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right rear center air vent
4 Temperature rocker switch, right
5 Display
6 Temperature rocker switch, left
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left rear center air vent

Display

You can also adjust the rear temperature using the front climate control
panel (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199).

1 Temperature, left
2 Temperature, right

You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C). The adjusted temperature appears in the display 5. The
rear climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible.

왘

Adjust the temperature to the desired
setting for each side of the passenger
compartment using the left and right
temperature buttons.
The temperature in the rear passenger
compartment is adjusted automatically.

i
The rear climate control will not cool
the air when the air conditioning is
switched off (컄 page 209).

211

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Adjusting air distribution
왘

Push the slide for the left center
vent 1 or right center vent 2 to the
left, right, up, or down.
The air flow is directed in the
corresponding direction.

i
For draft-free ventilation, push
slides 1 and 2 (컄 page 210) upward.

Adjusting the rear settings with the
front control panel
You can adjust the temperature for the
rear climate control from the front climate
control panel.
왘

Press button ™ or 5
(컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199).
The display switches over.

Turn thumbwheel 3 or 7
(컄 page 210) up or down.
The air volume is increased or
decreased.

212

Set the desired temperature for the
rear passenger compartment using
temperature rocker switches 4
and 6 (컄 page 210).
After approximately 5 seconds after
the last adjustment, the display switches back to its standard display.

i
You can also press button ™ or
5 (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199)
once more to switch back to the standard display.

Adjusting air volume
왘

왘

1 Rear climate control display

Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Front center console storage compartment ventilation
The front center console storage compartment under the armrest has its own air
vent. The air temperature is about the
same as that of the dashboard air vents.
The lever is located in the front center
vent.

왘

To open air vent slide the lever 1 up.

왘

To close air vent slide the lever 1
down.

i
The compartment can get very warm
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects (e.g. groceries)
in the compartment, close the air vent
while heating the passenger compartment.

1 Lever

213

Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning!
The side windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all of the side
windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger door and the rear
doors.

1 Rear window override switch
(컄 page 82)
2 Right front window
3 Right rear window
4 Left rear window
5 Left front window

214

When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch
or, if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
The door windows are equipped with the
express-close and automatic reversal function. If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance
where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window, the automatic reversal function will
stop the window and open it slightly.

If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing
and holding the lock button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside door handle,
the automatic reversal function will not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

Controls in detail
Power windows

Closing the windows

You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 217) and
“Convenience closing feature”
(컄 page 217).

With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter
switch, the power windows can be
operated:

왘

Depending on current position, the windows may also open or close when the
air recirculation button , in the automatic climate control (컄 page 198)
or (컄 page 199) is pressed and held.

i
Operating the windows from the rear is
not possible if you activate the override
switch (컄 page 82).

왘

앫

until you open the driver’s or front
passenger’s door

앫

for at least 5 minutes.

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

Opening the windows
왘

Press switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
point.

Pull switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.

Warning!

If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of
the window is blocked by some obstruction
including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.

The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.

215

Controls in detail
Power windows
!

Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
왘

If the upward movement of the window
is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open
slightly.

Press switch 2 to 5 past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window opens completely.

Remove the obstruction, pull the respective power window switch again
past the resistance point and release.

Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
왘

If the window still does not close when
there is no obstruction, pull and hold
the respective power window switch.
The side window will then close without
the obstruction sensor function.

Pull switch 2 to 5 past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window closes completely.

Warning!

Driver’s door only:
If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled
past the resistance point and released, the
automatic reversal will not operate.

216

Stopping windows during Express-operation
왘

Press or pull the respective power window switch again.

Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be synchronized
앫

after the battery has been disconnected

앫

if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close)

Synchronizing
왘

Close all doors.

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Pull switch 2 to 5 until the side windows are completely closed.

왘

Hold on to switches 2 to 5 for
approximately 1 second.

The power windows are synchronized.

Controls in detail
Power windows
Summer opening feature

Convenience closing feature

If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:

When you lock the vehicle, you can close
the windows, tilt/sliding sunroof simultaneously.

앫

opening the side windows

왘

앫

opening the tilt/sliding sunroof

앫

turning on the seat ventilation* for the
driver’s seat

Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
the driver’s outside door handle
(컄 page 217). The SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
in close proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.

왘

Press and hold button ‹ until the
windows, the tilt/sliding sunroof are
completely closed.
컄컄

i
The seat ventilation* for the driver’s
seat is automatically set to the highest
level if activated via summer opening
feature.

SmartKey
왘

With the vehicle unlocked, aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle. The
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.

왘

Press and hold button Œ until the
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof
have reached the desired position.

왘

Release button Œ to interrupt procedure.

217

Controls in detail
Power windows
컄컄 Vehicles

with KEYLESS-GO*:
Warning!

When closing the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
앫

1 Lock button
왘

Press and hold the lock button 1 at an
outside door handle until the windows,
the tilt/sliding sunroof are completely
closed.

왘

Release the lock button 1 at the outside door handle to interrupt procedure.

218

Release button ‹ to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫

Release the lock button (컄 page 62) on
the exterior driver’s door handle to stop
the closing procedure.

앫

Pull on the exterior driver’s door handle
and hold firmly. The side windows and
the tilt/sliding sunroof will open for as
long as the door handle is held but the
door not opened.

Controls in detail
Power tilt /sliding sunroof
왔 Power tilt /sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and
closed electrically. The switch for the
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead
control panel.

With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the sunroof opening
to guard against sun rays. When sliding the
sunroof open, the screen will also retract.

Warning!

When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch
was moved past the resistance point and
released, by moving the switch in any direction.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.

Sunroof switch

1 Push back to slide sunroof open
2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
4 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear

In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury
for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them
may protrude from the passenger compartment.
컄컄

219

Controls in detail
Power tilt /sliding sunroof
컄컄

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

You can also open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey (summer opening/convenience closing
feature) (컄 page 217).
Depending on current position, the
tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or
close when the air recirculation
button , in the automatic climate
control (컄 page 198) or (컄 page 199)
is pressed and held.

!
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
could result in malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄 page 407).

220

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 49).

Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
왘

To open, close, raise or lower the
tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch to resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4.
Release the sunroof switch when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.

Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close) the power tilt/sliding sunroof
왘

To open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch past the
resistance point in the direction of
arrow 1 to 2 and release.
The tilt/pop up roof opens or closes
completely.

Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-operation
왘

Move the sunroof switch in any direction.

i
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will
stop and reopen slightly.

Controls in detail
Power tilt /sliding sunroof
Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding
sunroof

왘

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized
앫

after the battery has been
disconnected or discharged

앫

after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
closed manually (컄 page 407)

앫

after a malfunction

앫

if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly

왘

Remove the respective fuse from the
main fuse box (컄 page 441).

왘

Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box.

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

Move and hold the sunroof switch in
the direction of arrow 3 until the
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
Keep holding the sunroof switch in the
direction of arrow 3 for approximately
1 second.

왘

Check the Express-open feature
(컄 page 220).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.

221

Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following driving systems are
explained on the following pages:
앫

앫

Cruise control and Distronic*, with
which the vehicle can maintain a preset
speed
Airmatic DC adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics automatically
and controls the vehicle level
Parktronic system*, which assists the
driver during parking maneuvers

For information on the BAS, ABS, ESP® and
electro-hydraulic brake system, see
“Driving safety systems” (컄 page 84).

Cruise control
Warning!
The cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column (컄 page 22).

The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road,
traffic, and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed.
앫

The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.

앫

The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.

앫

Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog.

The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.

222

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting current speed

왘

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.

왘

Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.

On uphill or downhill grades, the cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.

The current speed is set.
왘

1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at last set speed
Warning!

Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.

On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed with active
braking action. In addition, on longer
downhill grades the automatic transmission will automatically downshift.

The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed
to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.

The cruise control brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded.
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and
must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation.

223

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Canceling cruise control

There are several ways to cancel the cruise
control:

The cruise control automatically
switches off, if

왘

Step on the brake pedal.

앫

you step on the brake pedal.

The cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.

앫

you depress the parking brake
pedal.

Moving the gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
the cruise control. However, the gear
selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).

In this case the segments in the
multifunction display (컄 page 147)
go out and no warning sounds.

or
왘

Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 223).
The cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.

i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.

앫

the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h).

앫

the ESP® is in operation or switched
off with the ESP® switch
(컄 page 88).

앫

you move the gear selector lever to
position N while driving.

The segments in the multifunction
display (컄 page 147) go out, and an
acoustic warning sounds.

224

i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate the cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
왘

왘

Lift the cruise control lever in direction
of arrow 1 (컄 page 223) and hold it
up until the desired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.

Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 223).

The new speed is set.
Slower
Setting a lower speed
왘

왘

Depress the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 223) and
hold it down until the desired speed is
reached.

왘

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 223).

Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!

The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you and others.
왘

Release the cruise control lever.

When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the brake system will
automatically brake the vehicle if the
engine’s braking power does not brake
the vehicle sufficiently.

Briefly pull the cruise control lever to
position 4 (컄 page 223).
The cruise control resume the last set
speed.

The new speed is set.

왘

Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.

The selected speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds, and the corresponding speedometer segments from the selected speed
to the vehicle maximum speed are illuminated.

225

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control
during travel on expressways and other
major roads.
앫

앫

If the Distronic distance sensor detects
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so
that you follow that vehicle at a preset
distance.
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the same
way as cruise control (컄 page 223).
Warning!

Distronic adaptive cruise control is no substitute for active driving involvement. It does
not react to stationary objects, nor recognize or predict the curvature and lane layout
or the movement of vehicles ahead.
Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
of the vehicle’s braking power.

226

It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to road, traffic, and weather
conditions and to provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to retain control of the vehicle.

Warning!

Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended
to make cruise control more effective and
usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not
however, intended to, nor does it, replace
the need for extreme care. The responsibility for the vehicle speed and the distance to
the vehicle ahead, including most importantly brake operation to assure safe stopping distance, always rests with the driver.
Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account.

Warning!

Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.

i
USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

Controls in detail
Driving systems

i
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

Warning!

Distronic cannot take street and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if
the road, weather and traffic conditions
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.

Warning!

Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain,
snow or sleet.

Warning!

Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off Distronic or do not
turn it on if:
앫

roads are slippery or covered with snow
or ice. The wheels could lose traction
while braking or accelerating, and the
vehicle could skid.

앫

the sensor is dirty or visibility is
diminished due to snow, rain or fog. The
distance control could be impaired.

Always pay attention to traffic conditions
even while Distronic is switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize
dangerous situations until it is too late and
could cause an accident resulting in personal or fatal injury to you or others.

227

Controls in detail
Driving systems

Warning!

Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not Distronic is activated.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Switch off Distronic:
앫

when changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane

앫

when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp

앫

in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones

In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.

228

Distronic is designed and intended only to
maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it.

Warning!

Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial

The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.

1 Set speed
If Distronic is activated, one or two segments come on around the set speed.

i
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the
speed setting on the Distronic system.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘

Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the following warning note.

1 Segments
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the segments (representing the
difference) from the speed of the vehicle
ahead to the set speed come on.
If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision:
앫

The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on red.

앫

An intermittent warning sounds.

The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red distance warning
lamp l goes out when the necessary distance to the vehicle ahead is
again established.

Warning!

An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic
system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
maintain the preset following distance,
which creates a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
the distance to the vehicle in front of you.
The warning sound is intended as a final caution that you have not interceded with your
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking, as that will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact
being avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

229

Controls in detail
Driving systems

Warning!

Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
This corresponds to about 20% of the maximum deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the speed.

Distronic menu in the control system

Distronic deactivated

In the Distronic menu you can read the current settings for Distronic. What appears in
the multifunction display depends on
whether Distronic and the distance warning function are turned on or off.

When Distronic is deactivated you will see
the standard display in the multifunction
display.

왘

Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following displays.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function

230

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic activated

Cruise control lever

Activating Distronic

If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set
speed in the multifunction display for
about 5 seconds. When Distronic is
activated, you will see the following display
in the multifunction display.

The Distronic system is operated by means
of the cruise control lever.

You can activate Distronic if:

The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column.

앫

you are driving between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h)

앫

the ESP® is activated (컄 page 86)

If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever you will
see the message --- in the multifunction
display.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
1 Distronic activated

1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at last set speed

앫

up to 2 minutes after starting the
engine

앫

when you brake

앫

if you have set the parking brake

앫

if the gear selector lever is in
position P, R or N

앫

if the ESP® is switched off

231

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting the current speed

Setting a higher speed

Setting a lower speed

왘

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.

왘

Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
lever.
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.

왘

Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.

i
If you do not take your foot off the
accelerator completely, the following
message will appear in the multifunction display:
Distronic override.
The distance to a slower moving vehicles in front of you will not be set. Your
vehicle speed will then be determined
only by the accelerator pedal position.

232

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 231) to
increase vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 231) to
decrease vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).

The new speed is set.

The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds (컄 page 231), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
come on, on the speedometer
(컄 page 228).

Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate Distronic. After brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.

When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the brakes will be applied to support deceleration.
In addition, the transmission will
automatically downshift on long downhill grades.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 231).

Deactivating Distronic

Setting stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!

왘

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 231).

or
왘

Step on the brake pedal.
Distronic will be deactivated. The last
speed set will be stored in memory.

i
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 231).
Distronic is activated and set to the last
stored speed.

왘

There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:

Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.

The following message will appear in
the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds: Distronic off.
The last stored speed is deleted when
you turn off the engine.

233

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic deactivates automatically when:
앫

you set the parking brake

앫

you drive slower than 20 mph
(30 km/h)

앫

the ESP® is active (컄 page 86) or you
deactivate the ESP®

앫

you move the gear selector lever into
position N
A signal will sound. The Distronic off
message appears in the multifunction
display for approximately 5 seconds.
Warning!

Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) by operation of the
system. At that time the driver must apply
the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed
further or bring it to a stop.

234

Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following distance for Distronic by varying the time setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
the required following distance to the vehicle ahead. The set distance will be shown
in the multifunction display field.
The thumbwheel for making the time setting is located on the lower section of the
center console.
Warning!

It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.

1 Distance warning function on/off
switch
2 Indicator lamp
3 Thumbwheel for setting distance
Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘

Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘

Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯.

Distance warning function
When Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
the danger of a collision exists:
앫

The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.

앫

An intermittent warning will sound if
necessary.

If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.

When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound ceases. The warning sound will
also cease when the distance to the vehicle ahead is sufficient again without applying the brakes. In this case, the distance
warning lamp also go out.
Warning!

If the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, immediate attention on the part of the driver is
required. As required by the traffic situation,
apply the brakes and navigate around a possible obstacle. However, do not drive by
relying on the distance warning function, as
this will result in an emergency braking
application. Especially depending on road
surface conditions and driver reaction, this
will not always enable you to avoid a collision.

Complex driving situations are not
always fully recognized by Distronic.
This could result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
Activating
왘

Press switch 1.
The indicator lamp 2 on the switch
comes on. A loudspeaker symbol
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 231).

Deactivating
왘

Press switch 1.
The indicator lamp 2 on the switch
goes out. No loudspeaker symbol
appears in the multifunction display.

235

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is
required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. This will
deactivate the Distronic system.
Warning!

Distronic works to maintain the speed selected by the driver unless a moving obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. following another vehicle ahead of you at a distance set by Distronic). This means that:
앫

Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes.

앫

While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.

236

Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects
in the road, e.g.:
앫

a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam

앫

a disabled vehicle

앫

an oncoming vehicle

Distronic
Currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual

The driver must always be on the alert,
observe all traffic and intercede as required
by steering or braking the vehicle.

Warning!

The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
Distronic will switch off, and the message

Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.

appears in the multifunction display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic system
sensor” (컄 page 346).

i
If the message
Distronic
Currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual

disappears during driving and the last
speed stored flashes for approximately
5 seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic works again.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Turns and bends

Offset driving

Lane changing

In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.

A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.

237

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Narrow vehicles

Airmatic DC (Dual Control)
Airmatic automatically selects the optimum suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle. The Airmatic consists of two
components:

Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane have not yet been detected by
Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicles ahead.

앫

Adaptive Damping System (ADS)

앫

Vehicle level control

The ADS automatically selects the optimum damping for the respective driving
conditions. At the same time the suspension is set to either Sport 1, Sport 2 or
Comfort.

The following suspension styles are available:
앫

Comfort
Both indicator lamps 2 are off.

앫

Sport 1
One indicator lamp 2 is on.

앫

Sport 2
Both indicator lamps 2 are on.

Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:

238

앫

Your driving style

앫

Road surface conditions

앫

Your choice of suspension style,
Sport 1, Sport 2 or Comfort, which you
select using the damping button.

1 Damping button
2 Indicator lamps

Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘

Start the engine (컄 page 49).

Vehicle level control

왘

Press the damping button 1 until the
desired suspension style is set.

Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to

앫

increase vehicle safety

If you have selected the Comfort suspension tuning (컄 page 238), the vehicle lowers slightly when you lock it
within approximately 60 seconds after
switching off the engine. When parking,
make sure that your vehicle cannot
come into contact with other objects,
such as a curb, while lowering. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

앫

reduce fuel consumption

앫

The selected suspension style is stored
in memory, even after the SmartKey is
removed from the starter switch.

The following vehicle chassis ride heights
can be selected:
앫

Normal

앫

Raised

The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
At a speed exceeding approximately
68 mph (110 km/h) with normal level
set or exceeding 75 mph (120 km/h)
with raised level set, the ride height is
reduced automatically. The table on
the next page provides an overview of
the vehicle levels.

앫

With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the normal level.

i
These height adjustments are so small
that you may not notice any change.
Select the raised level only when required
by current driving conditions. Otherwise
앫

handling may be impaired

앫

fuel consumption may increase
Warning!

To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.

239

Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is running:
Vehicle level
Indicator lamp Suspension Use for
when stationary (컄 page 241) tuning

Ride height increase Automatic lowering
over normal

Normal

Lamp off

Comfort

For driving on normal
roads

None

Max. approx. 0.4 in (10 mm)

Normal

Lamp off

Sport 1 or 2

For driving on normal
roads

None

Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm)

Raised

Lamp on

Comfort

For driving on rough
roads or with snow
chains

Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.2 in (30 mm)

Raised

Lamp on

Sport 1 or 2

For driving on rough
roads or with snow
chains

Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm)

240

Controls in detail
Driving systems
The button is located in the lower section
of the center console.

왘

Start the engine (컄 page 49).

왘

Briefly press button 1 to change from
normal level to raised level. When vehicle is at raised level, pressing the button will return the vehicle to normal
level.

At a speed of approximately above
75 mph (120 km/h) or if the speed
amounts to between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h)
for approximately five minutes, the setting raised is canceled. The indicator
lamp 2 in the button goes out.

When raised level is set, indicator
lamp 2 in the button comes on.
When normal level is set, indicator
lamp 2 in the button goes out.
1 Vehicle level control button
2 Indicator lamp

If you do not drive in this speed range,
the raised level remains stored even if
the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch.

241

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system (Parking assist)*
Warning!
Warning!

Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors,
especially at times of snow and ice, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic system* sensors”
(컄 page 347).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or
the air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to send erratic indications, and should
be taken into consideration.

242

Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.

The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.

The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically
activated when you switch on the ignition,
release the parking brake, and placed the
gear selector lever in position D, R, or N.
The Parktronic system deactivates at
speeds over approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic
system turns on again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates
when you place the gear selector lever in
position P or depress the parking brake
pedal.

1 Sensors in the front bumper
Range of the sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic system* sensors”
(컄 page 347).

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Front sensors

Minimum distance

Center

approx. 40 in (100 cm)

Center

approx. 8 in (20 cm)

Corners

approx. 24 in (60 cm)

Corners

approx. 6 in (15 cm)

Rear sensors
Center

approx. 48 in (120 cm)

Corners

approx. 32 in (80 cm)

If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the distance warning segments
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance might no
longer be indicated by the system.

During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The
Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of the Parktronic system.

243

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
front area is located above the center air
vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is integrated in the
rear trim.

Front area warning indicator

1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
3 Readiness indicators

244

Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red segments for either
side of the vehicle. The Parktonic system is
operational when the yellow readiness
indicators 3 are illuminated.

앫

Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position P or the
parking brake is activated.

앫

Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red
distance segment illuminates and a
constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the gear selector lever is placed in position D, P or
the parking brake is activated.

The position of the gear selector lever
determines which warning indicators will
be activated.
Gear selector
lever position

Warning indicator

Front area activated

R or N

Front and rear area
activated

Neither activated

As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more segments will come on, depending
on the distance. When the seventh segment illuminates, you have reached the
minimum distance.

Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off

Switching off the Parktronic system
왘

The Parktronic system can be switched off
manually.
The Parktronic switch is located in the lower part of the center console (컄 page 28).

Press Parktronic switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.

Switching on the Parktronic system
왘

왘

Press Parktronic switch 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.

i
The Parktronic system is automatically
switched on when the ignition is
switched on (컄 page 36).

If only the red distance segments illuminates and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
there is an interference from other radio or
ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
will automatically switch off after
20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the
Parktronic switch comes on.
왘

Switch off the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 347).

왘

Switch on the ignition.

Parktronic system malfunction
1 Parktronic switch
2 Indicator lamp

If only the red distance segments illuminates and an acoustic warning sounds,
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
comes on.

Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

or
왘

Check the Parktronic system operation
at another location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic
signals.

245

Controls in detail
Loading
!

Roof rack*

Warning!

Load the roof rack in such a way that
the vehicle cannot be damaged while
driving.

Only use roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle.

Make sure
앫

you can fully raise the tilt/sliding
sunroof

Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly attached roof rack system or its load could become detached from the vehicle.

앫

you can fully open the trunk

Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
220 lb (100 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.

246

1 Trim
왘

Open trim 1 at the trim strips in the
roof.

왘

Secure the roof rack according to
manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions
Warning!
The total load weight including vehicle
occupants and luggage/cargo should not
exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity
weight indicated on the corresponding
placard located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible since it
influences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load.

Ski sack* (Canada only)
Unfolding and loading
왘

Fold rear armrest down (arrow).

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
Do not place anything on the rear-window
shelf.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior, resulting in unconsciousness
and death.

1 Cover
2 Catch
왘

Pull catches 2 in direction of arrows.

왘

Open the cover 1 downwards in the
direction of the arrow.
컄컄

247

Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄

1 Hook and loop fastener

1 Button

왘

Unfasten hook and loop fastener 1.

왘

Open the trunk.

왘

Pull ski sack into passenger compartment and unfold.

왘

Press button 1.

Warning!

The flap opens in direction of arrow.

왘

Open the front storage compartment in
the rear center console (컄 page 256).

The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.

왘

Remove the cup holder (컄 page 256).

248

왘

From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.

Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants.

Controls in detail
Loading

1 Strap

1 Cover

왘

Tighten strap 1 by pulling at the loose
end (arrow) until the skis in the ski sack
are tightly secured.

With insert or cup holder removed, fold
cover 1 upward.

1 Hook
2 Eye
왘

Connect hook 1 to eye 2 located in
the front storage compartment in the
rear center console.

왘

Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
end (arrow).

249

Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding

Removal of ski sack

왘

Loosen both straps.

왘

Disconnect hook 1 from eye 2.

For removal of the ski sack, we recommend that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

왘

Unload skis.

왘

Close flap in trunk.

왘

Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.

왘

Place folded ski sack inside recess of
backrest.

왘

Fasten hook and loop fastener

왘

Close ski sack compartment cover.

Warning!

Cargo tie-down hooks

Never drive vehicle with trunk open while
the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
interior, resulting in unconsciousness and
death.

i
To prevent unauthorized persons from
access to the trunk, always close the
cover.

250

Four hooks are located in the trunk.
왘

Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all hooks with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
Always follow loading instructions
(컄 page 247).

Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Storage compartments

Glove box

Opening and closing the glove box
왘

Warning!

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.

Press glove box lid release 3 to open.
The glove box lid opens downward.

왘

Push lid up to close.

Locking and unlocking the glove box

1 Unlocked
2 Locked
3 Glove box lid release

왘

Insert mechanical key (컄 page 402)
into the glove box lock.

왘

Turn the mechanical key to position 2
to lock or to position 1 to unlock the
glove box.

Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.

251

Controls in detail
Useful features

Storage compartment in the center
console (no CD changer* installed)

The storage compartment closes
automatically after approximately
30 seconds.

Storage compartment under center
armrest

Never place any medications in the
storage compartment. If there is a power failure, the storage compartment
cannot be opened.
왘

1 Opening/closing button
왘

Press button 1 to open.
The control panel swings out upwards
and the storage compartment extends
out.

Press button 1 to close.
1 Button to open storage compartment
2 Cover
Opening
왘

Press button 1 right or left and fold
the cover 2 sideward.

i
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the cover 2.

252

Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear storage compartment in the rear
center console

Storage compartment in the rear armrest

Storage compartment under the driver’s seat

1 Socket (컄 page 259)
2 Cover

왘

1 Tab

왘

Slide cover 2 back.

Press the handle upwards and fold the
rear armrest up.

왘

Pull tab 1 upward.

왘

Fold the covering forward.

Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage
it.

253

Controls in detail
Useful features
Ruffled storage bags

The ruffled storage bag cannot protect
transported goods in the event of an accident.

Parcel net in front passenger footwell

Ruffled storage bags are located on the
back of the front seats.
Warning!

Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.

254

The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.

The ruffled storage bag is intended for storing light-weight items only.

Warning!

A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holders

Warning!

The cup holder must be extended when in
use with bottles.

In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

Cup holder in the center console
Extending the cup holder

When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

왘

Briefly press mark on cup holder.
The cup holder automatically extends
upward.

Retracting the cup holder
왘

Press mark on cup holder and push cup
holder in until it engages.

255

Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing the cup holder

Cup holder in the rear center console

i
The cup holder can be removed for
cleaning. Clean the cup holder with
clear, lukewarm water.
왘

Extend cup holder (컄 page 255).

왘

Press mark on cup holder and remove
cup holder by pulling it upward.
1 Cover

1 Cup holder
2 Locking pin

Insert cup holder into opening.

왘

Move pin 2 in direction of arrow to unlock the cup holder.

Removing cup holder

왘

With the cup holder unlocked, take cup
holder 1 out upwards.

Reinstalling the cup holder
왘

Make sure that the cup holder is correctly positioned in the guide while you
are reinstalling it. Otherwise the cup
holder can be damaged.
왘

Press mark on cup holder and press
cup holder downward until it engages.

256

Slide cover 1 forward.

i
The cup holder can be removed for
cleaning. Clean the cup holder with
clear, lukewarm water.

Reinstalling cup holder
왘

Insert cup holder 1.

왘

Move pin 2 against direction of arrow
to lock the cup holder.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

Ashtrays
Center console ashtray

Removing ashtray insert
Warning!

Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to
secure vehicle from movement. Move gear
selector lever to position N. With gear selector lever in position N, turn off the engine.

왘

Briefly press the front of the rear armrest.
The cup holder extends automatically.

1 Cover
2 Sliding button
Opening ashtray
왘

Briefly press the marking on the bottom of cover 1.
The ashtray opens automatically.

Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.

왘

Push sliding button 2 to the right and
hold.

왘

Grip and remove insert from ashtray
frame.

257

Controls in detail
Useful features
Reinstalling ashtray insert

Opening rear seat ashtray

왘

Install insert by pushing it back into
frame until it engages again.

Rear door ashtray

Briefly press the top of the ashtray 1.
The ashtray opens.

Removing ashtray insert
왘

Push sliding button 1 and remove
insert 2 upwards from ashtray frame.

Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘

1 Sliding button
2 Insert slides out
3 Ashtray

258

Cigarette lighter

Install insert by pushing it back into
ashtray frame until it engages again.

Warning!

Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

Controls in detail
Useful features
The cigarette lighter is located in the center console compartment in front of the
center armrest (컄 page 28).

1 Cigarette lighter
왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.

!
The lighter socket can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical
accessories (up to a maximum 85 W)
designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in
mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter socket (for example extensive connecting and
disconnecting, or using plugs that do
not fit properly) can damage the lighter
socket. With the socket damaged, the
lighter may no longer be able to be
placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette
lighter socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories
designed for use with a standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V power outlets (컄 page 259) in your vehicle
whenever possible.

Power outlet
The power outlet is located in the rear storage compartment in the rear center console.

1 Power outlet
2 Cover
왘

Slide cover 2 back.

i
The power outlet can be used to accommodate 12-V DC electrical accessories (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps)
up to a maximum 180 W.

259

Controls in detail
Useful features

i
An additional power outlet is located on
the left side in the trunk.
Floormats

Warning!

Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.

Removing
1 Retainer pins
2 Eyelets

왘

Pull floormats off of retainer pins 1.

왘

Remove the floormats.

Installing

To install or remove the floormat more
easily, move the driver’s seat or front
passenger seat as far to the rear as
possible (컄 page 40).

왘

Lay down the floormat.

왘

Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto retainer pins 1.

260

Telephone*

Warning!

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.

Controls in detail
Useful features

Warning!

Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System) if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1

You can take and place telephone calls
using the s and t buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other telephone functions, use the control system
(컄 page 172).
See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone.

Tele Aid

!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid
system may only be performed by
completing the subscriber agreement
and placing an acquaintance call using
the ¡ button. Failure to complete
either of these steps will result in a
system that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
Shortly after the completion of your Tele
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.

Observe all legal requirements.

261

Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫

automatic and manual emergency

앫

roadside assistance

앫

information

The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.

The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the COMAND System or on the multifunction steering wheel. To raise, turn the
rotary volume control on COMAND System
clockwise or press button æ on the
multifunction steering wheel. To lower,
turn the rotary volume control on
COMAND System control counterclockwise or press button ç on the multifunction steering wheel.
왘

To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.

i
The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel (컄 page 264).
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the center armrest cover
(컄 page 252).

262

!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.

Controls in detail
Useful features

System self-check

Emergency calls

When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the COMAND System audio is muted
and the selected mode (radio, tape or
CD) pauses. The optional cellular
phone (if installed) and inserted in cradle switches off. If you must use this
phone, we recommend that you use it
only with the vehicle at a standstill in a
safe location. Remove the phone from
the cradle and place the call. The navigation* system (if engaged) will continue to run. The multifunction display in
the instrument cluster is available for
use, and spoken commands are only
available by pressing the RPT button on
the COMAND System. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND System display to indicate that a Tele Aid
call is in progress. After the Tele Aid
call has ended, the optional cellular
phone switches on again. A PIN entry
might be necessary.

Initially, after switching on ignition, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the
indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than 10 seconds or do not come on). The
message Malfunction. Drive to workshop appears in the multifunction display.

An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
air bags deploy.

Warning!

If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on
the Information button remain illuminated
continuously in red and/or the message
Malfunction. Drive to workshop is
displayed in the multifunction display after
the system self-check, a malfunction in the
system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.

An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See (컄 page 264) for
instructions on initiating an emergency call
manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp on the SOS button will
begin to flash. The message
Connecting Call appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message Call connected
appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such
as the location of the vehicle (determined
by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color
are generated.

263

Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to
determine more precisely the nature of the
accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if
앫

앫

it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response center

Initiating an emergency call manually

Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the
Response Center.

Warning!

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.

264

1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘

Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.

왘

Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.

왘

Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.

왘

Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.

Controls in detail
Useful features

Warning!

If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

Roadside Assistance button •

The Roadside Assistance button • is
located below the center armrest cover.

While the call is connected you can
change to the navigation menu by
pressing NAVI button on the COMAND
System unit.

왘

Open the storage compartment under
the center armrest (컄 page 252).

왘

Press and hold button (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting call will appear in the
multifunction display.

A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘

Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.

When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).

265

Controls in detail
Useful features
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Manual for more information.

These programs are only available in the
USA:

See system self-check (컄 page 263) if
the indicator lamp does not come on in
red or stays on longer than
approximately 10 seconds.

앫

Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.

266

The indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approximately
10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and
the Information button ¡).

If the indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • is flashing
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network was not available). The
message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be
terminated using the t button on
the multifunction steering wheel or the
END Button on the COMAND System.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡

The Information button ¡ is located
below the center armrest cover.

While the call is connected, you can
change to the navigation menu by
pressing NAVI button on the COMAND
System.

The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approximately 10 seconds during
the system self-check after switching
on the ignition (together with the
SOS button and the Roadside
Assistance button •).

왘

Open the storage compartment under
the center armrest (컄 page 252).

왘

Press and hold button (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display.

When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).

A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).

See system self-check (컄 page 263) if
the indicator lamp does not come on in
red or stays on longer than
approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously
and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display.

267

Controls in detail
Useful features
Information calls can be terminated
using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the END Button on the COMAND System.

!
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
the Tele Aid system has detected a
malfunction or the service is not
currently active, and may not initiate a
call. Visit your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and have the
system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.

268

Call priority

If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are
active, an Emergency call is still possible.
In this case, the Emergency call will take
priority and override all other active calls.

If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
in Canada.

i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or
Customer Assistance Center representative, whereas Roadside Assistance
and Information calls can also be terminated by pressing button t on the
multifunction steering wheel or using
the END button on the COMAND System.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock

Stolen Vehicle Recovery services

In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:

The remote door unlock feature is
available if the relevant cellular phone
network is available.

In the event your vehicle was stolen:

왘

The SOS button will flash and the
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display to indicate
receipt of the door unlock command.

Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.

왘

Then return to your vehicle and pull the
tailgate recessed handle for minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display.

As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.

Once the vehicle is unlocked, a
Response Center specialist may
attempt to establish voice contact with
the vehicle occupants.
If the tailgate recessed handle was
pulled for more than 20 seconds
before door unlock authorization was
received by the Response Center, you
must wait 15 minutes before pulling
the tailgate recessed handle again.

왘

Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered
incident report.

왘

Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Response Center will
contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.

i
When the anti-theft alarm or the
tow-away alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See
anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 93)
and tow-away alarm (컄 page 95).

269

Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener*
Warning!
The integrated remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices. It provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as garage door openers, gate openers, or other
devices compatible with HomeLink® or
some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control can
be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other
device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming information.

270

Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control

Indicator lamp

2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of
vehicle equipment):
5

Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator
or other device

Hand-held remote control button

Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
– signaling the door to stop and reverse –
does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.

Controls in detail
Useful features

When programming a garage door opener, it
is advised to park outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide
(CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.

Programming the integrated remote
control
Step 1:
왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

Step 2:
왘

If you have previously programmed a
signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to
step 3.

If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when the indicator lamp 1
begins to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory.
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.

Step 3:
왘

Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to
train approximately 2 to 5 in
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping the indicator
lamp 1 in view.

Step 4:
왘

Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held remote control
button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the buttons until step 5 is completed.
The indicator lamp 1 will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly.
컄컄

271

Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄

Rolling code programming

The indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button
has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds.

If the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly
for about 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
programming steps 8 through 12 as
your garage door opener may be
equipped with the “rolling code”
feature.

To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)

Step 5:
왘

After the indicator lamp 1 changes
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
button and the signal transmitter button.

Step 6:
왘

Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe the indicator lamp 1.
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the respective signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and
released.

272

Step 7:
왘

To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.

Step 8:
왘

Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
“training” button may also be referred
to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
operator’s manual.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 9:

Gate operator/Canadian programming

왘

Some garage door openers (or other
rolling code equipped devices) may
require you to press, hold for 2 seconds
and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to complete the
training process.

Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.

Press the “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.

You have 30 seconds to initiate the following two steps.
Step 10:
왘

Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4).

Step 12:
왘

Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).

Step 11:

Step 13:

왘

Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training process.

To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.

If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:

273

Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 4:

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successfully trained.

왘

Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.

왘

While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, the
indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.

Upon completion of programming the
integrated remote control, make sure
you retain the hand-held remote control that came with the garage door
opener, gate operator or other device.
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an
integrated remote control, or simply for
continued use as a hand-held remote
control to operate the respective
device in other situations.

The indicator lamp 1 will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with
step 3.

왘

Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.

274

Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:

Operation of integrated remote control
왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.

Controls in detail
Useful features
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Simultaneously press and hold down
the outer signal transmitter buttons 2
and 4, for approximately 20 seconds,
until the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.

i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.

Programming tips

앫

While performing step 3, hold the
hand-held remote control 6 at different lengths and angles from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.

앫

If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that
other hand-held remote control. Make
sure new batteries are in the hand-held
remote control before beginning the
procedure.

앫

Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/or
receiving signals.

If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
앫

앫

Check the frequency of the hand-held
remote control 5 (typically located on
the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible
with radio-frequency devices operating
between 288-399 MHz.
Put a new battery in the hand-held remote control 5. This will increase the
likelihood of the hand-held remote control sending a faster and more accurate
signal to the integrated remote control.

275

Controls in detail
Useful features

Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
remote control. If you should experience further difficulties with programming the integrated remote control,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center, or call Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.

USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:

Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

276

Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care

277

Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.

278

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫

Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.

앫

During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).

앫

Avoid accelerating by kick-down.

앫

Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the selector lever.

앫

Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).

앫

Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄 page 182) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).

After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.

!
Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫

During the first 1000 miles
(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).

앫

During this period, avoid engine
speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.

All of the above, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first
1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or
the rear differential has been replaced.

i
Always obey applicable speed limits.

Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫

Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.

앫

Remove unnecessary loads.

앫

Remove roof rack when not in use.

앫

Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.

앫

Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.

앫

Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the
Maintenance System. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Drinking and driving

Warning!

Pedals

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.

Warning!

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.

Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly area.

279

Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance

Warning!

The brake system requires electrical energy
for operation.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake
system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 354) and
warning messages in the instrument cluster
(컄 page 363) come on while driving. To
brake, the driver must then apply significantly greater brake pedal pressure and
depress the pedal much further to obtain
the expected braking effect. If necessary,
apply full pressure to the brake pedal.
Brakes may only be applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased!

280

If there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with
all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A tow
bar must be used if circumstances do not
permit the use of the recommended towing
methods and the vehicle requires towing
with all four wheels on the ground. Towing
the vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is only permissible for distances up
to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 437). For more information, see
“Electro-hydraulic brake system”
(컄 page 89).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.

Brakes

Warning!

After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.

Operation
Driving instructions
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.

If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system
(컄 page 89) or the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is too low.

If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.

Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.

Warning!

Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.

Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 86).

Have the brake system inspected by qualified technicians immediately. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Warning!

If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
Be certain to read and observe the warning
notices on brake pad replacement
(컄 page 374).

!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.

281

Operation
Driving instructions
Driving off

Parking

Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.

!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P.
When parking on hills, always set the
parking brake and turn front wheel
against road curb.

Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP® switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.

282

Warning!

Keep right foot on brake pedal.

앫

Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

앫

Move the selector lever to position P.

앫

Slowly release brake pedal.

앫

When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.

앫

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).

앫

Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
when leaving.

Tires

Warning!

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.

Operation
Driving instructions

Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.

Warning!

Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.

Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).

Warning!

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.

283

Operation
Driving instructions
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!

If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.

284

Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(컄 page 336) with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to make sure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
appropriate caution.

!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Warning!

Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.

Operation
Driving instructions
CLS 500

CLS 55 AMG (Performance Package*)

Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“V”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of up to 149 mph (240 km/h).

Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of up to 186 mph (300 km/h).

An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).

An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
186 mph (300 km/h).

CLS 500 (Sport Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of up to 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).

i
For information on speed rating for
winter tires, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 336).
For additional general information on
tire speed markings on tire sidewall,
see “Tire speed rating” (컄 page 324).

Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.

i
For more information on driving with
snow chains, see “Snow chains”
(컄 page 337).

CLS 55 AMG
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of up to 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).

285

Operation
Driving instructions

Warning!

Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.

Warning!
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible
after driving is resumed.

286

If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
interior resulting in unconsciousness and
possible death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.

Warning!

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.

For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 336).

Operation
Driving instructions
Standing water

!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Control and operation of radio transmitter

Passenger compartment

Warning!

COMAND, radio and telephone*

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.

Warning!

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.

Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit
Management and Data System), radio or
telephone1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Observe all legal requirements

287

Operation
Driving instructions
Telephones and two-way radios

Catalytic converter
Warning!

Warning!

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.

288

Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial
control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.

!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat, which could
potentially start a fire.

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or
operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.

Operation
Driving instructions
Emission control
Warning!
Certain systems of the engine serve to
keep the toxic components of the exhaust
gases within permissible limits required by
law.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly
according to factory specifications. Any
adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments should not be
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
service jobs must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.

Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).

The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!

앫

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be
seriously burned.

앫

Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.

289

Operation
At the gas station
Refueling

Warning!

Gasoline fuel is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause
serious injury. Whenever you are around
gasoline fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and skin
contact, extinguish all smoking materials.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline fuel!

The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.

290

왘

Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.

왘

Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow 1.
The fuel filler flap springs open.

왘

Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
to it until possible pressure is released.

왘

Take off the cap and set it in direction
of arrow 2 in the recess 3 on the fuel
filler flap.

1 To open the fuel filler flap
2 Fuel filler cap
3 To insert the fuel filler cap
왘

To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.

Turn the engine off
앫

by turning the SmartKey to
position 0.

앫

by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button. Open the driver’s door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is now in
position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch).

왘

Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.

Operation
At the gas station

Warning!

Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gasoline fuel discharge. This could cause the
gasoline fuel to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause
personal injury.
왘

Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise
until it audibly engages.

왘

Close the fuel filler flap.

i
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and
the ú malfunction indicator lamp
(USA only) or the ± malfunction
indicator lamp (Canada only) to illuminate.
See also “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 355).

Check regularly and before a long trip

Only use premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91(average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
For more information on gasoline, see
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet.
1 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
For more information on refilling the
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 300).
2 Brake fluid
For more information on brake fluid,
see “Brake fluid” (컄 page 464).
3 Coolant level
For more information on the coolant
level, see “Coolant level” (컄 page 297).

291

Operation
At the gas station
!

Engine oil level

Tire inflation pressure

If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately. Do not add brake
fluid as this will not solve the problem.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄 page 354).

For more information on engine oil level,
see “Engine oil” (컄 page 294).

For more information, see “Checking tire
inflation pressure” (컄 page 313).

292

Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 411).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄 page 134).

Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
왘

Hood

Warning!

Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.

Pull lever 1 downwards.

왘

Push lever 1 on the hood upwards.

The hood is unlocked.

왘

Pull up on the hood and then release it.

!
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.

Opening

The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Warning!

To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.

1 Hood release

1 Lever for opening the hood

293

Operation
Engine compartment

Warning!

If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.

Warning!

The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫

with the engine running

앫

while starting the engine

앫

if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually

294

Closing
Warning!

Engine oil

Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
왘

왘

The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫

the vehicle is new

Let the hood drop from a height of
approximately 1 ft (30 cm).

앫

the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds

The hood will lock audibly.

Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.

Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.

i
Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Operation
Engine compartment

Checking engine oil level with the
control system

If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j
button on the multifunction steering
wheel.

When checking the oil level
앫

the vehicle must be parked on level
ground

앫

with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 5 minutes with
the engine turned off

앫

with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have
been stationary for at least 30 minutes
with the engine turned off

To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display, do the following:
왘

앫

Engine oil level ok

앫

Add 1.0 Qt.

Press button k or j, on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
following message is seen in the multifunction display:

왘

If necessary, add engine oil.

For adding engine oil, see (컄 page 296).
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 461) and
(컄 page 464).

to reach max. oil level
(Canada: 1.0 Liter)
앫

Add 1.5 Qts.
to reach max. oil level to reach

max. oil level

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

The standard display (컄 page 147) should
appear in the multifunction display.
왘

One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the multifunction display:

앫

Other display messages
If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button* is not in position 2, the following
message will appear:

(Canada: 1.5 Liters)

Switch on ignition
to check engine oil level

Add 2.0 Qts.
to reach max. oil level to reach

왘

max. oil level

If you see the message:

(Canada: 2.0 Liters)

Observe waiting period

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

295

Operation
Engine compartment
왘

왘

If engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before repeating check
procedure.

If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:

If engine is not at operating temperature yet, wait 30 minutes before
repeating check procedure.

Engine oil level
Reduce oil level

If you see the message:
Engine oil level
Not when engine on
왘

Turn off the engine.

왘

If the engine is at normal operating
temperature, wait 5 minutes before
checking oil.

왘

If the engine is not yet at normal
operating temperature, you must wait
30 minutes before checking oil.

296

왘

Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 382).

Adding engine oil

!
Only use approved engine oils and oil
filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet in your
vehicle literature portfolio, or contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those
called for by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles) will result in engine damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

Operation
Engine compartment
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
왘

CLS 500, CLS 55 AMG

1 Filler cap
왘

Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.

왘

Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.

Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.

For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 461) and
(컄 page 464).

Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.

Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.

297

Operation
Engine compartment

Warning!

The coolant expansion tank is located on
the driver’s side of the engine compartment.

왘

The coolant level is correct if the level

In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫

앫

Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.

앫

Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out
under pressure.

앫

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

298

Coolant expansion tank
왘

Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn counterclockwise
to release any excess pressure.

Continue turning the cap counterclockwise and remove it.
앫

for cold coolant: reaches the top of
the mark (plastic bridge) visible
through the filling opening

앫

for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher

왘

Add coolant as required.

왘

Replace and tighten cap.

For more information on coolant, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 466).

Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
앫

Auxiliary battery (located in the engine
compartment).

앫

Main battery (starter and electrical
consumers; located in the trunk)
(컄 page 431).

The batteries should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve their rated service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.

all safety instructions
Wear eye protection.
and precautions when handling
G Observe
E
automotive batteries.
Keep children away.
Risk of explosion.
C
A
Follow the instructions in this
Keep flames or sparks away
Operator's Manual.
F
D from battery. Do not smoke.
acid is caustic. Do not
Batteries contain materials that can harm
allow it to come into contact
B Battery
the environment if disposed of improperly.
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clean
water and seek medical help if
necessary.

Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.

When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.

299

Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.

During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
container.
Warning!

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
왘

1 Washer fluid reservoir
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approximately 7.4 US qt
(7 l).

300

Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below
freezing point. Failure to do so could
result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.

!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield and
headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio”
(컄 page 470).

Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter
operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Warning!

Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫

The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged

앫

The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed

Warning!

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use Genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore not
assure the operating safety of the vehicle
when such tires are used.

Important guidelines
앫

Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.

앫

Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.

앫

Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.

앫

Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.

앫

If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as required.

앫

Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).

301

Operation
Tires and wheels
앫

앫

The wheels on the front and rear axles
are different. For this reason, pay attention to the markings on the inside of
the wheel rims. Wheels marked “REAR
AXLE ONLY” on the inside of the rim
may only be fitted on the rear axle.
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).

Tire care and maintenance

Warning!

Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.

302

Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure see
“Recommended tire inflation pressure”
(컄 page 311).
Tire inspection
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
앫

excessive treadwear (컄 page 303)

앫

cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber

앫

bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire

Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and become worn over
time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.

Life of tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫

Driving style

앫

Tire inflation pressure

앫

Distance driven
Warning!

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths under
1
⁄8 in (3 mm).
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point
the tire is considered worn and should be
replaced.

to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.

Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)

앫

Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning!

!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Cleaning tires

!
Never use a round nozzle to power
wash tires. The intense jet of water can
result in damage to the tire.

Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫

Storing tires

Always replace a damaged tire.

Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires

1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.

303

Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation

Loading the vehicle

Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.

Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.

An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.

i
Spare wheels may be mounted against
the direction of rotation (spinning) even
with a unidirectional tire for temporary
use only until the regular drive wheel
has been repaired or replaced. Always
observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel.

304

앫

The Tire and Loading Information
placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire
Information placard (Example B) can be
found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This
placard tells you important information
about the number of people that can be
in the vehicle and the total weight that
can be carried in the vehicle. It also
contains information on the proper size
and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment
tires on your vehicle.

앫

The Certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The Certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
is the total allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
either the front axle or rear axle.

Operation
Tires and wheels

Tire and Loading Information
Warning!

1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the two
placards with regards to loading your vehicle.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.

Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on
vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
Placard (Example A)

Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B).

1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard

305

Operation
Tires and wheels
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard (Example A),
locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on this placard. The combined weight of all
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue load (if applicable) should never
exceed the weight referenced in that
statement.

Placard (Example B)

The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is
equipped with either placard Example A or
placard Example B located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 305).

i
1 Load limit information on the Vehicle
Tire Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle
Tire Information placard (Example B),
locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on this placard. The combined
weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight listed next to
vehicle capacity weight.

306

Seating capacity

Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Seating
data are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on
vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining correct load limit

Step 3

The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under Title
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

왘

Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example A)
Placard (Example A)

왘

1 Seating capacity

Step 4
왘

Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s placard.

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lbs. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.)

Step 1 (Vehicles equipped with placard
Example B)

Step 5

왘

Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity
Weight” on your vehicle’s placard.

Step 2
왘

Placard (Example B)

Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.

Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
컄컄

1 Seating capacity

307

Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 Step
왘

6 (if applicable)

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 310).

The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 305).

308

Operation
Tires and wheels

Example Combined
weight limit
of occupants and
cargo from
placard

Number of Seating
occupants configura(driver and tion
passengers)

Occupants weight

Combined
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight of all tongue weight (total load limit or
occupants
vehicle capacity weight from placard minus combined weight of all
occupants)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs

630 lbs

1500 lbs - 630 lbs = 870 lbs

1500

front: 2
rear: 2

1500

front: 1
rear: 2

Occupant 1: 200 lbs
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs

540 lbs

1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs

1500

front:1

Occupant 1: 150 lbs

150 lbs

1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs

The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 310).

309

Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄 page 310) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle. You can obtain the
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label. The Certification Label can be found
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
data” (컄 page 446).

310

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄 page 310) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.

Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is between 10% and 15% of the trailer weight
and everything loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and their
cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure

Warning!

Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.

Your vehicle is equipped with either the
Tire and Loading Information placard
(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information
placard (Example B) located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 305).

The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).

Placard (Example A)

Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on placard.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the tire placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel
filler flap for any additional information
pertaining to special driving situations. For
more information, see “Important notes on
tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 312).

1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example A) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.

Data shown on placard examples are
for illustration purposes only. Tire data
are specific to each vehicle and may
vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle
for actual data specific to your vehicle.

311

Operation
Tires and wheels
Placard (Example B)

Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Warning!

If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly
drops:

1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
Placard (Example B) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire
inflation pressures listed apply to the tires
installed as original equipment.

i
Placard (Example B) may list
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for different vehicle loads.

312

앫

Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.

앫

Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.

Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire
inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.

Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
Warning!
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than 3 hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire
inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will
be underinflated.

Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘

Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.

왘

Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.

왘

Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 305) or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap. If necessary, add
air to achieve the recommended tire
inflation pressure.
컄컄

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit or vehicle capacity
weight as indicated on the placard located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout.

313

Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄

Run Flat Indicator*

If you have overfilled the tire, release
tire inflation pressure by pushing the
metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of
a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation
pressure with the tire gauge.

While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Flat Indicator* monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel’s
rotational speed. This allows the system to
detect a significant loss of pressure in a
tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changes
due to falling tire inflation pressure, you
will see a corresponding warning message
in the multifunction display.

왘

Install the valve cap.

왘

Repeat this procedure for each tire.

The Run Flat Indicator* may function in a
restricted manner or with a delay if:

314

앫

snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle

앫

winter road conditions prevail in presence of ice and snow

앫

you are driving on a loose surface (e.g.
sand or gravel)

앫

you are driving in a very sporty manner
(involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)

Warning!

When the multifunction display shows the
message Tire pressure Check tires,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Each tire, including the
spare, should be checked monthly when
cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and owner’s manual.

Operation
Tires and wheels

i
The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on
the tire placard located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 305). The tire
inflation pressures are not listed in the
owner’s manual.

Warning!

The Run Flat Indicator* does not provide a
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
The Run Flat Indicator* does not replace
regular checks of the tire inflation pressures
since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected by the Run Flat
Indicator*.
The Run Flat Indicator* is not able to issue a
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.

Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator*
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
reactivated in the following situations:
앫

If you have changed the tire inflation
pressure

앫

If you have replaced the wheels or tires

앫

If you have installed new wheels or
tires

왘

Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.

Warning!

The Run Flat Indicator* can only warn you in
a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
set, the system will monitor the pressure according to the incorrect value.

315

Operation
Tires and wheels
왘

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

If you wish to confirm activation:

Make sure the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 153).

왘

Press button k or j repeatedly
until the following message appears in
the multifunction display:

Press button æ.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
reactivated

After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
Flat Indicator* checks the set pressure values for all four tires.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘

Press button ç.

or
왘

Press button æ.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:

왘

Wait until the message
Tire pressure OK now?

Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (Advanced TPMS*),
(Canada only)

i
The Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System* (Advanced TPMS) is equipped
with a combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 25).
Depending on how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire pressure
condition or a malfunction in the TPMS
system itself:
앫

If the telltale illuminates continuously, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. There is
no malfunction in the TPMS.

앫

If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds
and then stays illuminated, the
TPMS system itself is not operating
properly.

disappears.

Tire pressure OK now?

316

Operation
Tires and wheels
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display.The present inflation
pressures are displayed only after a few
minutes travel time.

i
Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and
the vehicle’s control system can occur.
Usually the readings issued by the control system are more precise.

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Press the j or k button until
the current inflation pressures for each
tire appear in the multifunction display.

Warning!

It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.

i
i
When the message Tire pressure
displayed only after driving a few
minutes appears in the display, the in-

dividual inflation pressure values are
matched with the tires. The individual
values are displayed after a few minutes driving.

With a spare wheel without wheel sensor mounted, the system may still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the
removed wheel for some minutes. If
this happens, keep in mind that the indicated value where the spare wheel is
mounted does not reflect the actual
spare tire inflation pressure.

317

Operation
Tires and wheels

Warning!

The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.

318

Warning!

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.

Operation
Tires and wheels

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.

Reactivating Advanced TPMS*

If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunction develops, it may take up to
10 minutes for the system to signal a
malfunction using the TPMS telltale
flashing and illumination sequence.

The TPMS must be reactivated when you
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
a new level (e.g. because of different load
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.

The telltale extinguishes after a few
minutes driving if the malfunction has
been corrected.

i
Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the TPMS to malfunction.

Warning!

Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the supplemental tire pressure information on the
inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure
the tire inflation pressure of all four
tires is correct.
컄컄

319

Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄

i
Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting
the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the
vehicle operating condition. Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Observe the recommended tire
inflation pressure on the placard on the
driver's door B-pillar (컄 page 305).
Some vehicles may have supplemental
tire pressure information for driving at
high speeds (컄 page 312) or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded
vehicle condition. If such information is
provided, it can be found on the inside
of the fuel filler flap.
왘

Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 153).

320

왘

Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the current inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
multifunction display or the following
message appears in the multifunction
display

왘

The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Tire pres. monitor
reactivated

After a few minutes driving, the current
tire inflation pressure values are accepted as reference values and then
monitored.

Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving a
few minutes
왘

Press the æ button.

Press the reset button (컄 page 25).

If you wish to cancel activation:

The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:

왘

Check current
tire pressure?

Press the ç button.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires

Overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

앫

adversely affect handling
characteristics

앫

cause uneven tire wear

앫

be more prone to damage from road
hazards

앫

adversely affect ride comfort

앫

increase stopping distance

Overinflated tires can:

Underinflated tires can:
앫

cause excessive and uneven tire wear

앫

adversely affect fuel economy

앫

lead to tire failure from being
overheated

앫

adversely affect handling
characteristics

Warning!
Warning!

MOExtended system*
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.

You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator*
or the Advanced TPMS* (Canada only)
(컄 page 314).
For information on driving in case of pressure loss in one or more tires (emergency
mode), see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 429).

Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.

321

Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:

1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 329)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄 page 327)
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 328)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 329)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 331)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 322)
8 Load identification (컄 page 326)
9 Tire name

i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and
tires” (컄 page 449).

322

Tire size designation, load and speed
rating

1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
6 Tire speed rating

i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.

Operation
Tires and wheels
General:

Tire width

Tire code

Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.

The tire width 1 (컄 page 322) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.

No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.

The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 322) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.

The tire code 3 (컄 page 322) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.

Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.

Aspect ratio

At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 324).
Rim diameter
The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 322) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).

323

Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire load rating
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 322) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 328) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in
kilograms and lbs.
Warning!

The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄 page 332) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.

324

Warning!

For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 326).

i
Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 322) and
Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 322) are
also referred to as “service description”.

Tire speed rating
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 322)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Warning!

Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.

i
Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 322) and
Tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 322) are
also referred to as “service description”.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Summer tires
Index

Speed rating

up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

(Y)

above 186 mph (300 km/h)

above 149 mph (240 km/h)

앫

At the tire manufacturer's option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description

is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄 page 322) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄 page 322).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 322) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed
capability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 322) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).

앫

Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed
capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.

325

Operation
Tires and wheels
All-season and winter tires
Index

Speed rating
1

up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

M+S1

up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S

up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S

up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Q M+S
T

Load identification

No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.

or M+S.for winter tires

Light Load: designates a light load tire.

i
Not all M+S rated tires provide special
winter performance. Make sure the
tires you use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake.marking on the
tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers
Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) and have
been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions.

326

In addition to tire load rating, special load
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating
the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 326).

1 Load identification

i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.

C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.

Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation)

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 327)
which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.

Manufacturer’s identification mark

1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture

The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄 page 327) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (컄 page 301).

Tire size

For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.

The code 3 (컄 page 327) indicates the
tire size.

327

Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire type code

Maximum tire load
Warning!

The code 4 (컄 page 327) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 327)
identifies the week and year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.

1 Maximum tire load rating

i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.

328

For more information on tire load rating
(컄 page 324).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 307).

Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure

Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄 page 311) for proper
tire inflation.
Warning!

Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.

1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure

i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.

1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance

i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.

329

Operation
Tires and wheels
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200

All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.

330

Treadwear

Traction

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.

Warning!

Tire ply material

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.

1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread

i
For illustration purposes only. Actual
data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.

331

Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).

Bar

DOT (Department of Transportation)

Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.

A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure

Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.

332

Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.

The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GWV must never exceed the
GWVR indicated on the certification label
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

Operation
Tires and wheels
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

Maximum tire inflation pressure

PSI (Pounds per square inch)

This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.

This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.

A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).

Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight and production
options weight.

Recommended tire inflation pressure
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on placard located on driver’s door
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.

Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.

Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.

333

Operation
Tires and wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number)

Tire speed rating

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer's identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.

Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.

A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.

Tire load rating

The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.

Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

334

Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread

Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.

Vehicle capacity weight
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.

Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires

Warning!

Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.

Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 304).

In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.

Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).

If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer's recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6 000 miles
(5000 to 10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 304).

Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
Warning!

Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Only use Genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.

For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 398) and
(컄 page 419).

335

Operation
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
앫

Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration

앫

Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system
Add MB Concentrate “S” to a premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for temperatures
below freezing point (컄 page 468).

앫

Battery test
Battery capacity drops with decreasing
ambient temperature. A well charged
battery helps to make sure that the
engine can be started and the
electro-hydraulic brake system will be
fully operational, even at low ambient
temperatures.

앫

Tire change

336

Winter tires
Warning!
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated
tires provide special winter performance.
Make sure the tires you use show the
mountain/snowflake.marking on the
tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements
of the Rubber Manufacturers Association
(RMA) and The Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) and have been designed
specifically for use in snow conditions. Use
of winter tires is the only way to achieve
the maximum effectiveness of the ABS,
ESP® and electro-hydraulic brake system
in winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure that all
mounted winter tires are of the same make
and have the same tread design.

Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
longer suitable for winter operation.

Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such
notices are available at your tire dealer or
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Operation
Winter driving

Warning!

If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Block heater* (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Snow chains

!
When driving with snow chains, always
select the raised level of the level control system Airmatic (컄 page 239).
Other settings may result in damage to
your vehicle.
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.

Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫

Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations.

앫

Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.

앫

Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
be glad to advise you on this subject.

앫

Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.

When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP®
(컄 page 88) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the vehicle’s traction.

337

Operation
Winter driving
!
Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
clearance for snow chains. To help
avoid serious damage to your vehicle or
tires, use of snow chains is not permissible with the following tire sizes:
앫

275/30 R19 96V XL
(Extra Load) M+S.

앫

275/35 R18 95V

앫

285/35 ZR18 101Y XL (Extra Load)

앫

285/30 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load)

앫

T 155/70 R17 110M

앫

175/55-18 95P

338

Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service
indicator.

Maintenance service indicator message

Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Starting approximately 1 month before the
next maintenance service is due, one of
the following messages will appear in the
multifunction display while you are driving
or when you switch on the ignition (example service A):

(approx. 1 hour)
to

Service H

(approx. 8 hours)

The maintenance service indicator will
notify you when your next maintenance
service is due.

Service
Service
Service
Service

A
A
A
A

in XXXX Miles (km)
in XX Days
in X Day
due now

The maintenance services will be indicated
by showing a service type A through type H
in the multifunction display. Types A
through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service, ranging:
from

Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing
of maintenance services and intervals they
need to be performed at.

i
Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS
(Flexible Service System PLUS) only
(Canada vehicles): The interval between maintenance services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.

Service A

339

Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator
The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared after
30 seconds when you switch on the
ignition or when reaching the service
threshold while driving. You can also clear
it yourself.

왘

Press the reset button 1 on the
instrument cluster.

Calling up the maintenance service
indicator

The maintenance service indicator
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display.

You can call up the maintenance service
indicator display at any time to check
when the next maintenance service is due.

Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A exceeded by XXXXX Miles (km)
Service A exceeded by XXX Days
Service A exceeded by X Day

In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
1 Reset button

340

Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display appears in
the multifunction display (컄 page 147).

왘

Press button k or j until the
maintenance service indicator display
with the service symbol 9 and the
service deadline appears in the multifunction display.

Operation
Maintenance

i
If the battery is disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in
the count shown by the maintenance
service indicator. To arrive at the true
maintenance service deadline, you will
need to subtract these days from the
days shown in the maintenance service
indicator message or the maintenance
service indicator display.
Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level
indicator ù.

Resetting the maintenance service
indicator

In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator
reset. The automotive maintenance facility
carrying out the maintenance service will
find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your
vehicle. Such information is available from
either your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.

Only reset if the proper maintenance
service has been performed. Resetting
the system without performing the
proper service as called for by the
maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

If the maintenance service indicator
was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.

341

Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle

Warning!

Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.

While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.

Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:

앫

near the ocean

앫

in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)

Tar

앫

during winter operation

Gravel and stone chipping

You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.

앫

Air pollution

앫

Road salt

앫
앫

To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
앫

Grease and oil

앫

Fuel

앫

Coolant

앫

Brake fluid

앫

Bird droppings

앫

Insects

앫

Tree resins etc.

Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.

342

More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:

In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.

Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.

Power washer

When using a power wash for cleaning the
vehicle, always observe the manufacturer’s operating instructions.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

!
Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle
and the nozzle of the power washer.

Tar stains

Never use a round nozzle to
power-wash tires. The intense jet of
water can result in damage to the tire.

Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.

Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.

Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
normally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending on the climate and washing detergent used.

343

Operation
Vehicle care
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
왘

Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).

Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.

344

Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing

Hand-wash
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
왘

Only use a mild car wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.

왘

Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water.

In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
not forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.

i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
왘

Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.

왘

Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
the finish.

Operation
Vehicle care
Automatic car wash

Ornamental moldings

You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic
car washes without brushes are preferable.

After running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of
the windshield (컄 page 347). This will
prevent smears and reduce wiping
noise which can be caused by residual
wax on the windshield.

For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.

If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car
wash.

!
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic
car wash to prevent damage to the
mirrors.
Make sure that the windshield wiper
switch is set to 0 (컄 page 54). Otherwise, the rain sensor could activate and
cause the wipers to move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle damage.

When leaving the car wash, make sure
that the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate.

!
Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings. Although ornamental
moldings may have chrome appearance, they could be made of anodized
aluminum that will be damaged when
cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead,
use a damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
which you are sure are chrome-plated,
use a chrome cleaner. If in doubt
whether an ornamental molding is
chrome-plated, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

345

Operation
Vehicle care
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses

Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor
cover

To prevent scratches or damage, never
apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the
sensor cover 1. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or
sponge.

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.

!
Only use window cleaning solutions
that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which
are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps.
Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain solvents.
Never apply strong force and only use a
soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe
dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage
the lens surface.

346

왘

1 Distronic system sensor cover
왘

Switch off the ignition (컄 page 60).

왘

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water and a
non-scratching cloth to clean sensor
cover 1.

Restart the engine after cleaning sensor cover 1.

Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Parktronic system*
sensors

!
Do not apply strong pressure to the
sensor covers. Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers.

Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades

!
The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away
from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood.

Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle
and the nozzle of the power washer.

!
1 Parktronic system* sensors in the front
bumper
왘

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water and a soft,
non-scratching cloth to clean
sensors 1 on the bumpers.

To prevent scratches, never apply
strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the
sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty
sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.

왘

Switch on the ignition (컄 page 36).

왘

Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 54).

왘

With wiper arms in vertical position,
switch off the ignition (컄 page 60).

Warning!

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the windshield the
windshield and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn
on and cause injury.
컄컄

347

Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄 왘

Fold the wiper arms forward until they
snap into place.

왘

Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.

왘

Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.

!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch or
pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.

348

Light alloy wheels

To clean the window interior, do not
use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or
cleaners containing solvents. Do not
touch the inside of the front, rear or
side windows with hard objects such as
an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.

If possible, clean wheels once a week.

!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.

왘

Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
spray of water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.

!
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage
the clear coat.

Operation
Vehicle care
!

Plastic and rubber parts

Hard plastic trim items

The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately
after it has been cleaned, especially not
after the wheel rims have been cleaned
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim
cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it
is parked after cleaning.

왘

When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz
approved Wheel Care products, take
care not to spray them on the brake
discs.

Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.

Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.

Do not use oil or wax on these parts.

To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents.

Instrument cluster and cup holders
왘

왘

Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution.

!
To prevent scratches, do not use scouring agents.

Steering wheel and gear selector lever
왘

Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz
approved Leather Care.

Carpets
왘

Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
and Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.

349

Operation
Vehicle care
Headliner and shelf below rear window

Leather upholstery

왘

Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.

Seat belts
왘

Only use clear, lukewarm water and
soap.

!
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry
the webbing at temperatures above
176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.

Warning!

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.

350

Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.

Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Wood trims
왘

Dampen cloth using water and use
damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
vehicle.

!
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.

Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses

351

Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster

General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the

bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and
replaced if necessary.

Problem

Possible cause/consequence

Suggested solution

The yellow ABS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.

The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
switched off. The BAS and the ESP® are also
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
switched off (see messages in multifunction
display).
왘 Read and observe messages in the
The electro-hydraulic brake system is still
multifunction display (컄 page 363).
functioning normally but without the ABS
왘 Have the system checked at an authoavailable.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, othas possible.
er systems such as the Parktronic system*,
Failure to follow these instructions inDistronic*, or the automatic transmission
creases the risk of an accident.
may also be malfunctioning.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The ABS has switched off.

왘

Switch off electrical consumers that
are currently not needed, e.g. seat
heating.

왘

If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.

The battery may not be sufficiently charged.

When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again.

352

Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem

Possible cause/consequence
®

The yellow ABS/ESP warning
lamp comes on while driving.

The yellow ABS/ESP® warning
lamp flashes while driving.

The ESP is deactivated.

Suggested solution

You are driving with the parking brake set.

왘

Release the parking brake.

왘

Observe the additional message in
the multifunction display.

(Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.

;
3

(USA only)

There is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system.

왘

Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display (컄 page 376).

앫

There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.

왘

Risk of accident! Do not drive any
further. Consult a Mercedes-Benz
Service Center. Under no circumstances should you top up the brake
fluid. This will not solve the problem.

(Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running and you hear a warning
sound.

Warning!

Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.

354

앫

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.

!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem

ú
±

Possible cause/consequence

Suggested solution

(USA only)

There is a malfunction in:

왘

(Canada only)

앫

The fuel management system

The yellow engine malfunction 앫 The ignition system
indicator lamp comes on while
앫 The emission control system
driving.
앫 Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.

Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system.
It allows the accurate identification of
system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is
located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake.

i
Some states may by law require you to
visit a workshop immediately as soon
as the engine malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Check local requirements.

355

Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem

ú
±

Possible cause/consequence

Suggested solution

A loss of pressure has been detected in the 왘 Check the fuel cap.
fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed If it is not closed properly:
(Canada only)
properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
The yellow engine malfunction
왘 Close the fuel cap.
indicator lamp comes on while
If it is closed properly:
driving.
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(USA only)

Your fuel tank is empty.

왘

After refuelling start, turn off and restart the engine three or four times in
succession.

The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.

356

Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem

Possible cause/consequence
The red coolant warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running.

Suggested solution

There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Immediately add coolant to prevent
engine from overheating
(컄 page 297).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.

왘

Have the cooling system checked.

왘

If the coolant temperature is below
266°F (130°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

왘

Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.

왘

Stop as soon as possible and allow
the engine and coolant to cool down.

If the coolant level is correct, the electric
radiator fan may be broken.

The red coolant warning lamp
The coolant temperature has exceeded
comes on while driving and you 266°F (130°C).
hear a warning sound.

The red distance warning lamp
comes on while driving.

Warning!

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to

You are too close to the vehicle in front of you 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to into maintain selected speed.
crease the following distance.
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.

357

Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem

Possible cause/consequence

Suggested solution

The red distance warning lamp 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
comes on while driving and you
ahead of you.
hear a warning chime sound.
왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
앫 The distance warning system has recogYou may need to brake or maneuver
nized a stationary obstacle on your probto avoid hitting an obstacle.
able line of travel.

The yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp comes on while
driving.

The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your
on for a brief period after starting passengers to fasten your seat belts before
the engine.
driving off.

358

The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.

왘

Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 290).

왘

Fasten your seat belts.
The telltale goes out.

The red seat belt telltale comes The driver’s seat belt is not fastened before 왘 Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
on and a warning chime sounds the engine is started.
The telltale goes out.
for approximately six seconds after starting the engine.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem

Possible cause/consequence
The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.

Warning!

Suggested solution

There is a malfunction in the restraint sys왘 Drive with added caution to the neartems. The air bags or emergency tensioning
est authorized Mercedes-Benz
devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
Center.
fail to activate in an accident.

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.

359

Practical hints
What to do if …

Problem

Possible cause/consequence

Suggested solution

Combination low tire
The Advanced TPMS* detects a loss of pres- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
pressure/TPMS malfunction tell- sure in at least one tire.
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
tale for the Advanced TPMS* illumaneuvers. Observe the traffic situaminates continuously.
tion around you.
왘

Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display.

If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the
combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.

Combination low tire
There is a malfunction in the Advanced
pressure/TPMS malfunction tell- TPMS*.
tale for the Advanced TPMS*
flashes for 60 seconds and then
stays illuminated.

왘

Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display.

왘

Have the Advanced TPMS* checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

After the malfunction has been remedied
the combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.

360

Practical hints
What to do if …

Warning!

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.

361

Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Problem

Possible cause/consequence

75 The passenger front
air bag off indicator
lamp comes on and remains illuminated
(컄 page 78).

Suggested solution

A BabySmart child seat is installed on
the passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front air bag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there 왘 Have the system checked at an authois no BabySmartTM child seat installed on
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
the passenger seat.

The passenger front
The system is malfunctioning.
air bag off indicator
lamp does not come on
or does not remain illuminated with a
BabySmartTM child seat
properly installed on
the passenger seat.

왘

Make sure there is nothing between
seat cushion and child seat.

왘

Check installation of the child seat
(컄 page 80).

If the passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp remains out:
왘

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.

Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
transport children on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.

362

Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in
the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄 page 147) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.

Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 24) or
button j, k, è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button or button j,
k, è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel. They are then stored in the
vehicle status message memory
(컄 page 156). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message
disappear. Clearing a message will not
correct the condition that caused the message to appear.

Warning!

All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated,
addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.

363

Practical hints
What to do if …

Warning!

Switching on the ignition causes all
instrument cluster lamps (except high
beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps
and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey.

364

On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into two sections:
앫

Text messages (컄 page 365)

앫

Symbol messages (컄 page 373)

Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display message

Possible cause/consequence

ABS

The ABS has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
and has switched off.
will lock during hard braking, reducing steering
capability.
®
The ESP and the BAS are also deactivated.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The electro-hydraulic brake system

Malfunction
Visit workshop

Possible solution

is still functioning normally but with- Failure to follow these instructions increases the
out the ABS available.
risk of an accident.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop

The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.

왘

Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
will lock during hard braking, reducing steering
capability.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.

Cruise
control

Drive to workshop

Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunctioning.

왘

Have the cruise control or the Distronic*
checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

365

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display message

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Distronic

External interference
Reactivate

The Distronic* is switched off and is 왘 Try activating the Distronic* again later.
temporarily unavailable.

Drive to workshop

The Distronic* is malfunctioning or
the display is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

Currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual

Distronic* is switched off if:

왘

If necessary, clean the Distronic* cover in the
area of the radiator grille (컄 page 346).

앫

the Distronic* cover in the area
of the radiator grille is dirty
왘 Restart the vehicle.

앫

the functionality is impaired by
heavy rain or thick fog

or
Distronic* becomes operational again without the
engine being restarted when:
앫

dirt on the grille falls off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)

앫

the system recognizes full sensor availability
(due to lessening rain or the road surface drying)

앫

the message in the multifunction display disappears

앫

the speed last stored flashes in the display for
5 seconds.

You can operate Distronic* as usual again.

366

Practical hints
What to do if …

Warning!

Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off Distronic or do not
turn it on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is
diminished as a result of snow, rain or fog.
The distance control may be impaired even
before the system is able to detect a dirty
sensor. The message
Distronic
Currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
will be displayed in the multifunction display
and Distronic will be turned off.

367

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display message

ESP

Malfunction
Visit workshop

Possible cause/consequence
ESP®

The
has detected a malfunction and switched off.

Possible solution
왘

Continue driving with added caution.

왘

Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

The ABS may not be operational.

The electro-hydraulic brake system Failure to follow these instructions increases the
is still functioning normally but with- risk of an accident.
out the ESP® available.
unavailable
See Operator’s Manual

The ESP® is deactivated because the 왘 Synchronize the ESP®. With the vehicle stapower supply was interrupted.
tionary, turn the steering wheel completely to
the left and then to the right to synchronize the
The electro-hydraulic brake system
ESP®.
is still functioning normally but without the ESP® available.
If the ESP® message does not go out:
왘

Continue driving with added caution.

왘

Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.

!
When synchronizing the ESP®, make
sure you can turn the steering wheel in

368

both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects, e.g.
a road curb.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display message

ESP

Display malfunction
Visit workshop

Possible cause/consequence
ESP®

The
or the
functioning.

ESP®

Possible solution

display is mal- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘

Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.

Gear selector lever
in Park

You have attempted to turn off the
engine with the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button with the gear
selector lever not in P. You have
opened the driver's door with the
gear selector lever not in P.

P/N

Shift to
Neutral or Park

You have attempted to start the
왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P
engine with the KEYLESS-GO*
or N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.
start/stop button while the gear selector lever was in position R or D.

Low Battery
Conven. functions
temporarily
unavailable

The battery has insufficient voltage As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient, the
and can no longer supply conveconsumers will switch on again.
nience functions such as the rear
window defroster.

왘

Place the gear selector lever in position P.

369

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Please note:
Conven. functions
available again

On-board voltage is sufficient; the
consumers will switch on again.

Run Flat Indicator
inactive

Run Flat Indicator* is
malfunctioning.

Check tires
Then reactivate
Run Flat Indicator

There was a warning message about 왘 Make sure that the correct tire inflation presa loss in the tire inflation pressure
sure is set for each tire.
and the Run Flat Indicator* has not
왘 Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator*.
been reactivated yet.

Run Flat Indicator
unavailable

The Run Flat Indicator* has been
switched off due to an error.

Tire pressure
Check tires

The Run Flat Indicator* indicates
왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
that the pressure is too low in one or
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Obmore tires.
serve the traffic situation around you.

370

Possible solution

왘

Have the Run Flat Indicator* checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

왘

Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 313).

왘

If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 423).

왘

Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator* after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values
(컄 page 315).

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving a
few minutes

The tire inflation pressure is being
checked.

왘

Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.

Tire pres. monitor
currently unavailable

The Advanced TPMS* is unable to
monitor the tire pressure due to

왘

As soon as the causes for the malfunction are
no longer present, the Advanced TPMS* automatically becomes active again after a few
minutes driving.

왘

Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Tire pres. monitor
inoperative

앫

a nearby radio interference
source.

앫

excessive wheel sensor temperatures.

The Advanced TPMS* is
malfunctioning.

371

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Tire pres. monitor
inoperative
No wheel sensors

There are wheels without wheel sen- 왘 Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an ausors mounted (e.g. winter tires).
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Tire pres. monitor
Wheel sensor missing

앫
앫

왘

Have the wheel sensors installed by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

One or more sensors malfunction (e.g. battery is empty).

왘

Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

One or more wheels without
wheel sensors mounted (e.g.
spare tire).

왘

Have the wheel sensors installed by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The tire inflation pressure for the respective tire is not shown in the multifunction display.

372

Possible solution

Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Low voltage
Switch off
consumers

The battery has insufficient voltage.

왘

Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers.

Visit workshop

The battery is no longer charging.

왘

Stop immediately in a safe location or
as soon as it is safe to do so and
check the poly-V-belt.

Possible causes:
앫

alternator malfunctioning

앫

broken poly-V-belt

If it is broken:

왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
Do not forget that the brake system
the engine will overheat due to an
requires electrical energy and may be
inoperative water pump which may reoperating with restricted capability.
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
Considerably greater brake pedal force is
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
required and the stopping distance is
If it is intact:
increased.
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.

373

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Battery/Alternator
Stop vehicle

The battery is malfunctioning.

왘

Low voltage
Start engine

The battery has insufficient voltage.

Brake wear
Visit workshop

The brake pads have reached their wear 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon
limit.
as possible.

2
!

Brake pad thickness must be visually
inspected by a qualified technician at
the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet.

374

Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.

The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical energy and therefore has
only limited operation. Considerably
greater brake pedal force is required and 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
the stopping distance is increased.
Center.
왘

Start the engine (컄 page 49).

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Release parking
brake

You are driving with the parking brake
set.

왘

Reduced braking power
Depress brake
pedal fully

The electro-hydraulic brake system is in 왘 Do not drive any further.
emergency operation mode. Consider왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location and
ably greater brake pedal force is required
notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
and the stopping distance is increased.
Center.
The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph
왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
(90 km/h).
by blocking the wheels with wheel
chocks or other sizable objects.

(USA only)

;
(Canada only)

Reduced braking power
Start engine

The battery has insufficient voltage and
cannot supply sufficient power to the
electro-hydraulic brake system.

Release the parking brake
(컄 page 51).

왘

Call for Roadside Assistance.

왘

Start the engine.
The message disappears when sufficient voltage is available.

375

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

(USA only)

Reduced braking power
Visit workshop

The electro-hydraulic brake system is in 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
emergency operation mode. Consider왘 Adjust driving to be consistent with
able brake pedal force is required and the
reduced braking responsiveness.
stopping distance is increased.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Service brake
Visit workshop

There are malfunctions, but the
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
electro-hydraulic brake system is operatCenter as soon as possible.
ing normally.

Brake overheated
Drive on, but with
even greater care

The brake system is overheated due to an 왘 Relieve the load on the brake system.
excessive load on the brakes.
왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead
to avoid unnecessary braking.

;
(Canada only)

376

Possible solution

왘

When driving down slopes, shift into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking
power (컄 page 183).

왘

Cautiously continue driving so that
the air stream will cool down the
brakes.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

(USA only)

Brake fluid
Visit workshop

There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.

왘

;
(Canada only)

Warning!

Driving with the messages “Brake fluid Visit
workshop” displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately.
If there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend that the vehicle be transported with
all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.

Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, refer to “Towing the vehicle”
(컄 page 437).
If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters
its emergency operation mode, the driver
must apply significantly greater brake pedal
pressure and depress the pedal much further than normal to obtain braking effect. If
necessary, apply full pressure to the brake
pedal. Brakes may only be applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is increased!

Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a
safe location and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.

Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.

!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.

377

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

(USA only)

Visit workshop

There may be a malfunction in the:

왘

Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

왘

Add coolant (컄 page 297).

왘

If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

ú
(Canada only)

Warning!

fuel injection system

앫

ignition system

앫

exhaust system

앫

fuel system

The coolant level is too low.

Coolant
Check level

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.

378

앫

!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing major
engine damage.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Coolant
Stop, engine off

The coolant is too hot.

왘

Stop the vehicle in a safe location.

왘

Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Warning!

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.

During severe operation conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).

!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.

379

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

Coolant
Stop, engine off

The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location and immediately turn off the engine.
왘

Check the poly-V-belt.

If it is broken:
왘

Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine
will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If it is intact:

Coolant
Visit workshop

왘

Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Warranty.

왘

Observe the coolant temperature indicator in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 24).

왘

Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

The cooling fan for the coolant is 왘 Observe the coolant temperature indicator in the
malfunctioning.
instrument cluster (컄 page 24).
왘

380

Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Display malfunction
Visit workshop

The displays for several systems have
malfunctioned. Some systems themselves may also have malfunctioned.

왘

When the multifunction display is malfunctioning, warnings and malfunction messages might not be
displayed.
왘

Display malfunction
Visit workshop

Engine
Service

Continue driving with added caution.

Have the electronic systems checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Certain electronic systems are unable to 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
relay information to the control system.
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The following systems may have failed:
Center.
앫

Coolant temperature display

앫

Tachometer

앫

Cruise control display

There may be a malfunction in:
앫

the fuel injection system

앫

the ignition system

앫

the exhaust system

왘

Have the engine checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

381

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Doors open

You are attempting to drive with one or
more doors open.

왘

Close the doors.

USA only:

The engine oil level is too low.

왘

Add engine oil (컄 page 296) and
check the engine oil level
(컄 page 295).

There is no oil in the engine. There is a
danger of engine damage.

왘

Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
soon as possible.

왘

Turn off the engine.

왘

Add engine oil (컄 page 296) and
check the engine oil level
(컄 page 295).

왘

Have oil siphoned or drained off.
Observe all legal requirements with
respect to its disposal.

Add 1 Qt. engine oil
at next refueling

Canada only:
Add 1 Liter engine oil
at next refueling
Engine oil level
Stop, engine off

Engine oil level
Reduce oil level

382

You have added too much engine oil.
There is a risk of damaging:
앫

the engine

앫

the catalytic converter

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Engine oil level
Visit workshop

The engine oil has dropped to a critical
level.

왘

Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 295) and add oil as required
(컄 page 296).

왘

If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.

Change engine oil
Visit workshop

It may be that there is water in the engine 왘 Have the engine oil checked.
oil.

Oil sensor malfunction
Visit workshop

The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

When the Engine oil - Visit workshop
message appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately
the minimum level.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.

If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest service station where the
engine oil should be topped to the required
level with an approved oil specified in the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet.

!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in
serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

383

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Reserve fuel

The fuel level has dropped below the re- 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
serve mark.
(컄 page 290).

Check gas cap
See Operator’s Manual

A loss of pressure has been detected in 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 290).
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be If it is not closed properly:
closed properly or the fuel system may be
왘 Close the fuel cap.
leaky.
If it is closed properly:

384

Hood open

You are driving with the hood open.

왘

Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

왘

Close the hood (컄 page 293).

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Key
still in vehicle

A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the 왘 Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.

Keyless Go
Check system

The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
ing.
Center as soon as possible.

Do not
forget key

This display appears (for a maximum of 왘 Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened
왘 Take the SmartKey with
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving
in the starter switch.
the vehicle.
This message is only a reminder.

Remove key

You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.

왘

Remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch.

Replace key

There is no additional code available for
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

385

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Key
Check battery

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batter- 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 408).
ies are discharged.

Key
not recognized

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not
recognized while the engine is running
because

Key
not recognized

앫

the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
not in the vehicle

앫

there is strong radio-frequency interference

Possible solution

왘

Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.

왘

Search for the SmartKey.
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be
started again after the engine is
stopped.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey
mentarily not recognized.
in the vehicle.
왘

386

Operate the vehicle with the
SmartKey in the starter switch if necessary.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Active headlamps
currently
unavailable

The Bi-Xenon cornering lamps system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning.
Center as soon as possible.

Active headlamps
malfunction
Drive to workshop

The Bi-Xenon cornering lamps system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning.
Center as soon as possible.

Active headlamps
Substitute bulb on

The active headlamps are malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Another light is being used.
Center as soon as possible.

Backup lamp,
left

The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning.

Backup lamp,
right

The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Brake lamp
Drive to workshop

Brake lamp illumination is delayed or
lamp is permanently on.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Brake lamp, left
Substitute bulb on

The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A
substitute bulb is being used.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Brake lamp, right
Substitute bulb on

The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
substitute bulb is being used.
Center as soon as possible.

3rd brake lamp

The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tioning.
Center as soon as possible.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

387

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Front foglamp,
left

The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Front foglamp,
right

The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Front Marker light,
left

The front left side marker lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Front Marker light,
right

The front right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Fr. Park. lamp, left
Substitute bulb on

The left front parking lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
ing. A substitute bulb is being used.
Center as soon as possible.

Fr. Park. lamp, right
Substitute bulb on

The right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

High beam,
left

The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

High beam,
right

The right high beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.

License plate lamp,
left

The left license plate lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.

388

Possible solution

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

License plate lamp,
right

The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Light sensor
Drive to workshop

The light sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.

왘

In the control system, set lamp operation to manual mode (컄 page 164).

왘

Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch.

Low beam,
left

The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp:
왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘

Low beam,
right

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

The right low beam lamp is malfunction- Halogen headlamp:
ing.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

389

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Rear foglamp
left

The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Rear foglamp
right

The right rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Switch off lamps

Lamps have been turned on although the 왘 Switch off the headlights.
SmartKey in the starter switch is in position 0.

Taillamp, left
Substitute bulb on

The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A sub- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
stitute bulb is being used.
Center as soon as possible.

Taillamp, right
Substitute bulb on

The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
substitute bulb is being used.

390

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Turn sig., left rear
Substitute bulb on

The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.

Turn sig., right rear
Substitute bulb on

The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.

Turn sig., left front
Substitute bulb on

The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.

Turn sig., right front
Substitute bulb on

The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Turn signal,
left mirror

The left turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.

왘

Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.

Turn signal,
right mirror

The right turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
malfunctioning. This message will only
possible.
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.

391

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Seat belt system
Drive to workshop

The seat belt system is malfunctioning.

왘

Service memory full
See Operator’s Manual

The maintenance service system memory 왘 Have the service memory checked by
cannot save any more data.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Close
tilt/sliding sunroof

You have opened the driver’s door with
the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch and the sliding portion of the
tilt/sliding sunroof open.

왘

Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
(컄 page 220).

Close
tilt/sliding sunroof

You have opened the driver’s door with
the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch and the tilting portion of the
tilt/sliding sunroof open.

왘

Close the tilt/sliding sunroof
(컄 page 220).

392

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Tele Aid malfunction
Drive to workshop

One or more main functions of the
Tele Aid system are malfunctioning.

왘

Tele Aid battery
Drive to workshop

The emergency power battery for the
왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by
Tele Aid system is malfunctioning. If the
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
vehicle battery is also dead, Tele Aid will
not be operational.

Restraint system
malfunction
Visit workshop

The system is malfunctioning.

Warning!

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.

왘

Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Center immediately to have the system
checked; otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.

For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz

393

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Caution
Tire defect

One or more tires are deflating.

왘

The respective tire is shown in the
multifunction display.

Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.

왘

If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 419).1

왘

Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The tire pressure in one or more tires 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
is already below the minimum value.
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.

Check tires

The respective tire is shown in the
multifunction display.

왘

Check and adjust tire pressure as required.

왘

If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 419).1

왘

Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicles with TIREFIT*: Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.

Warning!

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

394

You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Please rectify
tire pressure

The pressure is too low in one or
more tires.

왘

Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
required (컄 page 313).

왘

Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.

왘

If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 419).1

왘

Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Tire pressure
One or more tires are deflating.
Caution, tire defect

The tire pressure in one or more tires 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
is already below the minimum value.
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.

Tire pressure
Check tires

왘

Check and adjust tire pressure as required.

왘

If necessary, change the wheel (컄 page 419).1

왘

Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicles with TIREFIT*: Temporarily repair tire using TIREFIT. If tire cannot be temporarily repaired using TIREFIT, contact Roadside Assistance.

Warning!

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

395

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Function
unavailable

This display appears if button t or
s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.

Trunk open

This message will appear whenever the
trunk is open.

Washer fluid,
please refill

The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 300).
of total reservoir capacity.

Vehicle rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to your level selection.

Vehicle rising
Please wait briefly

The vehicle level is too low.

Possible solution

왘

Close the trunk.

Do not drive off.
The Airmatic has not yet adjusted the
vehicle level to the necessary height
required for driving.

왘

Wait until the message disappears
from the multifunction display.
You may then drive off.

396

Practical hints
What to do if …

Display symbol

Display messages

Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Stop, car too low

The Airmatic* is malfunctioning.

Avoid excessive steering input. The fender or tires could otherwise be damaged.
Listen for scraping noises. Do not drive
faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
왘

Drive to the side of the road and select a higher vehicle level
(컄 page 239). Depending on the type
of malfunction, this may raise the vehicle’s level.

There is otherwise danger of an accident.
Display malfunction
Visit workshop

The system display or the system is mal- 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
functioning.
(80 km/h).
왘

Visit workshop

Have the vehicle checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The system is functional only to a limited 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
extent.
(80 km/h).
The system display or the system is mal- 왘 Have the vehicle checked at an
functioning.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

397

Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit

TIREFIT*

Spare wheel

The first aid kit is in the storage compartment at the front edge of the front passenger seat.

The TIREFIT kit is located under the trunk
floor.

The spare wheel is located under the trunk
floor.

왘

Lift the trunk floor and engage the handle in the upper edge of trunk.

왘

Remove the luggage box (컄 page 401).

Lift the trunk floor and engage the handle in the upper edge of trunk.

1 Tab
왘

Pull tab 1 upward.

왘

Fold the covering forward.

왘

Remove the first aid kit.

i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.

398

1 Vehicle tool kit
2 Electric air pump
3 TIREFIT kit

1 Vehicle tool kit
2 Spare wheel
3 Luggage bowl

Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Removing the spare wheel
왘

Turn luggage bowl counterclockwise.

왘

Remove spare wheel 2.

Storing the spare wheel
왘

Place spare wheel 2 in wheel well.

왘

Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop
to secure the spare wheel.

!
Always lower trunk floor before closing
the trunk.

i
Vehicles with collapsible tire:
The electrical air pump is located under
the luggage bowl 3.

Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor
(컄 page 398).
The vehicle tool kit includes:
앫

One pair of universal pliers

앫

One towing eye bolt

앫

One wheel wrench

앫

One alignment bolt

앫

One fuse extractor

앫

One collapsible wheel chock

앫

Spare fuses

Vehicle jack
Warning!

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on a level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.

399

Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock

The vehicle jack is located in the storage
compartment underneath the trunk floor.

The collapsible wheel chock serves to
additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
changing the wheel.

Operational position
왘

Storage position
왘

Remove vehicle jack from its
compartment.

왘

Turn crank handle in direction of arrow
as far as it will go.

Turn crank handle clockwise.

Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment:
앫

It should be fully collapsed

앫

The handle must be folded in (storage
position)
1 Tilt the plate upward
2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate

400

Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왘

Tilt both plates upward 1.

왘

Fold the lower plate outward 2.

왘

Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
way into the openings of the base
plate 3.

Luggage box

왘

Turn fastening clips 1 to the left upwards from fastening bolts.

왘

Lift luggage box in the area of the fastening bolts and remove it from trunk.

Install luggage box

왘

Insert luggage box into trunk so that
fastening clips are in line with fastening
bolts.

왘

Push front edge of luggage box in direction of arrow under cover of trunk sill.

왘

Press fastening clips onto fastening
bolts until they lock into place.

Remove luggage box

1 Fastening clip
2 Luggage box

401

Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the driver’s door

Unlocking the vehicle
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, open the driver’s door and
the trunk using the mechanical key.

i
Unlocking driver’s door and/or the
trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the
starter switch.

1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key

1 Unlocking

왘

Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops.

왘

Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1.

Move locking tab 1 in the direction of
the arrow and slide mechanical key 2
out of the housing.

The driver’s door is unlocked.

402

Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk

왘

A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.

Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock.

왘

If you are unable to unlock the trunk with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the
trunk with the mechanical key.

Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 2 and hold it in this
position.

왘

Pull trunk handle and lift the trunk lid.

왘

The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.

Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*, do the following:
왘

Close the passenger doors and the
trunk.

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 1 and remove it.

왘

Press the central locking switch in the
cockpit (컄 page 123).

왘

Check to see whether the locking
knobs on the passenger doors have
moved down.

왘

If necessary push them down manually.

왘

Remove the mechanical key 2 out of
the SmartKey (컄 page 402).

왘

Check whether the trunk is locked.

왘

If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key (컄 page 121).

Always make sure there is sufficient
overhead clearance.

1 Locking
2 Unlocking

Except for the driver's door, the vehicle
should now be locked.
컄컄

403

Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
컄컄

Fuel filler flap emergency release
In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, you can open
it manually.

Manually unlocking the gear selector
lever
In case of power failure, the gear selector
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow
the vehicle.

1 Locking
왘

Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops.

왘

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 1.

1 Release knob

The driver’s door is locked.

왘

Open trunk.

왘

Remove right-side tail trim.

왘

Pull release knob 1 in the direction of
arrow.
The fuel filler flap can know be opened.

404

1 Selector lever cover
2 Release

Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왘

Insert flat, blunt object (e.g. screwdriver) into the left edge of cover 1 at the
position indicated by the arrows.

왘

Loosen cover 1 using this object.

왘

Using your hands, pull cover 1 out
and remove.

왘

Push down and hold release 2 in
direction of arrow.

왘

Simultaneously move gear selector
lever out of position P.
The gear selector lever is unlocked
now.

i
The gear selector lever is locked again
as soon as you place it in position P
again.

405

Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency

Power tilt/sliding sunroof

Turn crank 3 slowly and smoothly.

You can open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof manually should an electrical malfunction occur.

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated
manually (컄 page 221).

The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located behind lens 1 of the interior overhead light.

2 Hole
3 Crank
왘

Take crank 3 out of the glove box.

왘

Insert crank 3 through hole 2.

왘

Turn crank 3 clockwise to:

1 Cover
왘

Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.

왘

Press on cover 1 in direction of the
arrow to release it.

406

왘

앫

slide roof panel/sunroof closed

앫

raise roof panel/sunroof at the rear

Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
앫

slide roof panel/sunroof open

앫

lower roof panel/sunroof at the
rear

Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
왔 Resetting activated head restraints
If the active head restraint have been triggered in an accident, the head restraints
must be reset. Otherwise, active head restraint cannot offer any additional protection in the event of another rear-end
collision.

i
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You will find the reset tool for manually
operating the head restraints in the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.

왘

Take the reset tool out of the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
Guide reset tool into center of head restraint between head restraint cushion
and rear head restraint cover.

!
Be careful not to damage upholstery.

왘

Press reset tool forward in direction of
arrow.

왘

Press reset tool downward until you
hear the head restraint release
mechanism audibly engage.

왘

Pull out reset tool.

왘

Firmly press head restraint cushion
backward towards rear head restraint
cover until it engages.

Warning!

When pushing back the head restraint cushion, take care that your fingers do not become caught between the head restraint
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
lead to injury.
왘

Repeat this procedure for second head
restraint.

For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 39).

407

Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning!

Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.

Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.

408

i
When inserting the batteries, make
sure they are clean and free of lint.

i
When replacing batteries, always
replace both batteries.

SmartKey
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘

Remove the mechanical key 1
(컄 page 402).

The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz
Center.

1 Mechanical key
2 Slide
3 Battery compartment

Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왘

Insert the mechanical key 1 in direction of arrow in side opening.

왘

Remove the batteries 4 in direction of
arrow.

왘

Using mechanical key 1 push gray
slide 2 to unlatch battery
compartment 3.

왘

Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
batteries 4 under the contact
spring 5 with the plus (+) side facing
up.

왘

Pull the battery compartment 3 out of
the housing in direction of arrow.

왘

Return battery compartment 3 into
housing until it locks into place.

왘

Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.

왘

Check the operation of the SmartKey.

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘

Remove mechanical key (컄 page 402).

왘

Insert the mechanical key 3 in side
opening and push grey slide
(컄 page 408).
Battery compartment is unlatched.

왘

Pull battery compartment out of the
housing in direction of arrow
(컄 page 408).

4 Battery
5 Contact spring

409

컄컄

Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왘

컄컄

Using mechanical key 3 apply pressure to position 2.
Battery 1 tilts up slightly.

1 Battery
2 Tilt battery up
3 Mechanical key

410

왘

Pull out batteries 1 in direction of
arrow.

왘

Using a lint-free cloth, insert new
batteries 1 with the plus (+) side facing up.

왘

Return battery compartment into housing until it locks into place.

왘

Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.

왘

Check the operation of the SmartKey
and the KEYLESS-GO*.

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.

If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of
high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up
the fogging.

Substitute bulbs will be brought into
use when lamps malfunction. Observe
the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 387).

Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.

411

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp

Rear lamps
Type
LED

7 High mounted brake
lamp

2 Turn signal lamp

PY (21 W)

3 Halogen headlamps:
Low beam

H7 (55 W)

8 Brake, tail, parking,
HiP
standing, backup lamps LED*
and turn signal lamps.
Rear fog lamp

4 Side marker lamp

W5W

5 Halogen headlamps:
High beam/high beam
flasher
H7 (55 W)
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
High beam flasher
H7 (55 W)
Parking and standing
lamps
6 Front fog lamp

412

Type

1 Additional turn signal
lamps

Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
Low and high beam1
D2S-35 W

Lamp

W5W
H11 (55 W)

Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam
and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do
not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

9 License plate lamps

LED

C5W

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs

Warning!

Notes on bulb replacement
앫

Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.

Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.

앫

Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.

Keep bulbs out of reach of children.

앫

Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.

Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫

touch or move it when hot

앫

drop the bulb

앫

scratch the bulb

Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.

앫

Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.

앫

If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center:
앫

Additional turn signals in the exterior
rear view mirrors

앫

High mounted brake lamp

앫

Bi-Xenon* lamps

앫

Front fog lamps

앫

Front side marker lamps

앫

Rear lamps (except license plate
lamps)

i
Have the headlamp adjustment
checked regularly.

413

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Low beam bulb (halogen headlamps
only)

Replacing bulbs for front lamps

1 Housing cover for low beam halogen or
Bi-Xenon* headlamp
2 Housing cover for high beam headlamp/high beam flasher bulb and for
parking and standing lamp bulb
Warning!

Do not remove the cover 1 for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high voltage in
Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.
We recommend that you have such work
done by a qualified technician.

414

3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
4 Bulb holder of high beam bulb
5 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
6 Bulb holder of low beam bulb
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 134).

왘

Open the hood (컄 page 293) (except
for side marker lamps).

왘

Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise and remove it.

왘

Turn bulb holder 6 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.

왘

Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 6.

왘

Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 6
and is level to it.

왘

Reinsert bulb holder 6 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.

왘

Align housing cover 1 and turn it
clockwise.

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam bulb/high beam flasher
bulb (halogen headlamps)/high beam
flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps)
왘

Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.

왘

Turn bulb holder 4 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.

왘

Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 4.

왘

Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 4
and is level to it.

왘

Reinsert bulb holder 4 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.

왘

Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.

Front turn signal lamp bulb

Parking and standing lamp bulb

왘

Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.

왘

Turn housing cover 2 counterclockwise and remove it.

왘

Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
socket 3.

왘

Pull out bulb socket 5 with the bulb.

왘

Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 5.

왘

Press the new bulb into bulb socket 5.

왘

Press bulb socket 5 back into the
lamp.

왘

Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.

왘

Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 3 and turn clockwise until it
engages.

왘

Place bulb socket 3 back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.

415

Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 134).

Tail lamp unit

왘

Loosen both screws 1.

The tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbs.

왘

Remove the license plate lamp.

왘

Replace the bulb.

왘

Reinstall the license plate lamp.

왘

Retighten screws 1.

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps

Warning!

License plate lamp

The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot be replaced individually. The tail lamp bulbs are
under pressure and could explode during an
attempt to replace them.
If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, have
them exchanged at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

416

1 Screw

Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
왔 Replacing wiper blades
!
The windshield wipers must be in a
vertical position before folding them
away from the windshield. They could
otherwise damage the hood.

Removing wiper blades

Warning!

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: make sure the
vehicle's on-board electronics have status
0) before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn
on and cause injury.
왘

Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 1.

왘

Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 54).

왘

With wiper arm in the vertical position,
turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0.

왘

Fold the wiper arm forward until it
snaps into place.

왘

Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
wiper arm.

왘

Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
the retainer.

417

Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades

왘

Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until
it locks in place.

Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.

왘

Rotate wiper blade into position parallel to wiper arm.

왘

Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield. Make sure you hold on
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.

Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

418

Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
The CLS 55 AMG with Performance
Package* is equipped with a TIREFIT kit.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘

Preparing the vehicle
왘

Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
when possible.

왘

Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

왘

Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead
position.

왘

Set the parking brake.

왘

Move the gear selector lever to P.

Vehicles with SmartKey:
왘

Turn off the engine (컄 page 60).

왘

Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.

왘

Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* button on the gear
selector lever once (컄 page 60).
Open the driver’s door (this puts the
starter switch in position 0, same as
with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then
can be closed again.

i
Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
왘

Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.

Sealing tires with TIREFIT

i
CLS 55 AMG with Performance
Package* only.

Warning!

Keep TIREFIT away from sparks, open flame
or heat source.
Do not smoke.

Small tire punctures, particularly those in
the tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT.
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures down to -4°F (-20°C).

419

Practical hints
Flat tire

Warning!

TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
damage caused by driving with extremely
low tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or
a damaged wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances.
Contact your nearest Mercedes-Benz
Center for assistance or call Roadside
Assistance.
왘

Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed from the tire.

왘

Take TIREFIT, the sticker, and the electric air pump out of the trunk.

왘

Attach the sticker where it will be easily
seen by the driver on the instrument
cluster.

Warning!

If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You
can then peel it off.

Take care not to allow the contents of
TIREFIT to come in contact with hair, eyes or
clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or absorbed through the skin - causes
skin, eye and respiratory irritation.
Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
change clothing as soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately.

Warning!

Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.

420

1 TIREFIT container
2 Flap
3 Notch
4 Electrical plug
5 Air hose
6 Flange
왘

Open flap 2 on the electric air pump.

왘

Pull plug 4 and air hose 5 out of the
pump housing.

Practical hints
Flat tire
왘

Screw the air pump’s air hose 5 onto
flange 6 of the TIREFIT container.

왘

Unscrew the valve cap from tire
valve 7.

왘

Stick TIREFIT container 1 upside
down into notch 3 of the electric air
pump.

왘

Screw filler hose a onto tire valve 7.

왘

Close vent screw 9 on air hose 4.

왘

Insert electrical plug 4 into the vehicle cigarette lighter socket
(컄 page 258).

왘

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 (컄 page 36).

왘

Press I on electric air pump switch 8.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.

7 Tire valve
8 Electric air pump switch
9 Pressure gauge and vent screw
a Filler hose
Warning!

Do not operate the electric air pump
longer than 8 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it may overheat.

After 5 minutes, the pressure gauge must
display at least 26 psi (1.8 bar). The air
hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
왘

If this tire inflation pressure is not attained, turn off the electric air pump,
detach the filler hose from the tire
valve, and drive vehicle back and forth
very slowly approximately 30 ft (10 m).
This serves to better distribute the
TIREFIT sealant material inside the tire.

왘

Unscrew the air pump’s air hose 5
from flange 6 of the TIREFIT container.

왘

Screw air hose 5 onto tire valve 7.

왘

Inflate the tire again.

컄컄

You may operate the air pump again after it has cooled off.

Observe safety instructions on air pump label.

421

Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄

Warning!

If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
is not attained, tire is too severely damaged
for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire repair.

왘
왘

Close the trunk lid.

왘

Drive off immediately.
The TIREFIT sealant will distribute itself
evenly inside the tire.

In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal
the tire.
Do not drive the vehicle.
Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
왘

After attaining a tire inflation pressure
of 26 psi (1.8 bar), press 0 on electric
air pump switch 8.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.

왘

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 (컄 page 36).

왘

Detach the electric air pump.
The air hose may still be hot. Please
exercise appropriate caution.

422

Place the electrical air pump back in
the trunk.

Warning!

Do not exceed vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not
designed to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics may
change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
왘

After driving the vehicle for an initial
10 minutes, check the tire inflation
pressure using pressure gauge 9 on
the air pump.

Warning!

If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the
vehicle.
Park your vehicle safely away from the roadway and contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
Assistance.
If tire inflation pressure is at least
20 psi (1.3 bar), inflate tire to correct pressure (see placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar), and drive vehicle to nearest tire repair facility to have tire repaired or replaced.
Recommended duration of use:
300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h)
with the recommended tire inflation pressure.

Practical hints
Flat tire

Warning!

Follow recommend inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
door opening). Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible to obtain a
new TIREFIT kit.

왘

Bring used TIREFIT materials to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
proper disposal.

Warning!

Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed
to operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by
the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics may
change. Adapt your driving accordingly.
왘

Replace your TIREFIT container every
4 years. Replacement containers are
available at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mounting the spare wheel

Warning!

The dimensions of the spare wheel
(Minispare or collapsible tire) are different
from those of the road wheels. As a result,
the vehicle handling characteristics change
when driving with a spare wheel mounted.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minispare or collapsible tire is mounted.

423

Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Prepare the vehicle as described under
“Preparing the vehicle” on this page.
왘

Take the spare wheel out of the trunk
(컄 page 398).

왘

Take the wheel wrench and the jack
out of the trunk (컄 page 398).

Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack
on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a hill,
place the wheel chock and the other sizeable object as follows:
왘

Place the wheel chock and another
sizeable object on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the axle not
being worked on.

Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.

Lifting the vehicle
왘

Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
or other sizeable objects.

When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘

Place the wheel chock in front of and
another sizeable object behind the
wheel that is diagonally opposite to the
wheel being changed.

424

Warning!

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into either side of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.

1 Wheel wrench
왘

On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with
wrench 1).

Practical hints
Flat tire
The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.

Warning!

The jack is intended only for lifting the
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle.

왘

1 Jack take-up bracket
2 Jack
왘

Place jack 2 on firm ground.

왘

Position jack 2 under take-up
bracket 1 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.

Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while
vehicle is raised.

앫

Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.

앫

Never lie down under the raised vehicle.

Removing the wheel

1 Alignment bolt

425

Practical hints
Flat tire
왘

Unscrew the upper-most wheel bolt
and remove.

왘

Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.

왘

Remove the remaining bolts.

왘

Mounting the spare wheel
Warning!
Warning!

Vehicles with collapsible tire:
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly mounted.

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.

Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
pump (컄 page 427) before lowering the
vehicle.

Remove the wheel.

왘

Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.

왘

Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.

왘

Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.

!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.

426

Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident. Be
sure to use the correct wheel bolts.

Practical hints
Flat tire

Warning!

Inflating the collapsible tire

Only use Genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
왘

Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.

Vehicles with Minispare wheel:
왘

Continue the procedure by following
the instructions under “Lowering the
vehicle” (컄 page 429).

Vehicles with collapsible tire:
왘

Continue the procedure by following
the instructions under “Inflating the
collapsible tire” and then “Lowering the
vehicle” (컄 page 429).

Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the collapsible tire. Otherwise the
rim may be damaged.
왘

Take the electric air pump out of the
trunk (컄 page 398).

Warning!

Observe instructions on air pump label.

1 Flap
2 Air pump switch
3 Electrical plug
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
5 Union nut
왘

Open flap 1 on the air pump.

왘

Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
with pressure gauge 4.

왘

Make sure the vent screw on air hose
4 is closed.

왘

Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.

427

컄컄

Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 왘
왘
왘

Screw union nut 5 onto the tire valve.

Insert electrical plug 3 into vehicle
cigarette lighter socket (컄 page 258).

Do not operate the air pump longer
than 8 minutes without interruption.
Otherwise it may overheat.

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1.

You may operate the air pump again
after it has cooled off.

or
왘

왘

Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever once
without depressing the brake pedal.

Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.

왘

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0.

Press I on electric air pump switch 2.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.

왘

or
왘

Inflate the tire to approximately 51 psi
(3.5 bar).
This takes about 5 minutes for the collapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union
nut 5 can become hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution to avoid
burning yourself when using the equipment.

428

Press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
on the gear selector lever twice without
depressing the brake pedal.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.

왘

If the tire inflation pressure is above
51 psi (3.5 bar), release excess tire inflation pressure using the vent screw.

Warning!

Detach the electric air pump.

왘

Stow electrical plug 3 and air hose 4
behind flap 1 and place the air pump
back in the trunk.

Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle
왘

왘

Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.
Remove the jack.

Warning!

Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
왘

1 - 5 Wheel bolts
왘

Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).

Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed.

MOExtended system*
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator*
or the Advanced TPMS* (Canada only)
(컄 page 314).

Wrap the damaged wheel in the protective film that comes with the spare
wheel and put the wheel in the trunk.

The maximum distance in emergency
mode depends on the vehicle’s load. It
is 30 miles (50 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and 18 miles (30 km) if the
vehicle is fully loaded.

You can also place the damaged wheel
down into the spare wheel well. In this
case, you must stow the luggage bowl
in the trunk.

The point at which the maximum driving distance begins in emergency
mode is when the warning message
appears in the multifunction display
indicating that there is a loss of tire
inflation pressure.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).

429

Practical hints
Flat tire

Warning!

In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
characteristics are diminished in such situations as:

Do not continue driving in emergency mode
if
앫

you notice knocking sounds

앫

the vehicle starts to shake

앫

smoke develops and you smell rubber

앫

driving around curves

앫

ESP® is intervening continuously

앫

while braking

앫

you notice tears on the tire sidewalls

앫

while accelerating rapidly

Therefore, your driving style must be adapted accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and
driving maneuvers, as well as driving over
obstacles (road curbs, potholes, or off-road
areas). This is especially important if the
vehicle is heavily loaded.
The emergency driving distance that can be
achieved greatly depends on the demands
placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can
be significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is
driven cautiously, somewhat longer.

430

After driving in emergency mode, you must
have the rims inspected by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
suitable for further use. The failed tire must
be replaced in any case.

i
When replacing individual or all tires on
the vehicle, make sure only matching
tires marked with “MOExtended” are
mounted in the size specified for your
vehicle (컄 page 456).

Practical hints
Battery
왔 Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with two batteries:
앫

Auxiliary battery (back-up battery; stabilizes the electrical system if the main
battery is discharged; located in engine
compartment).

앫

Main battery (starter and electrical
consumers; located in the trunk under
the luggage box).

왘

Remove the luggage box (컄 page 401).

Warning!

Jump starting must only be done using the
main battery in the trunk.

Warning!

Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 299).

1 Positive terminal cover
2 Negative terminal

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.

!
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely damaged.

Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.

Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.

Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information.

431

Practical hints
Battery

Warning!

Disconnecting the battery

Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.

The electro-hydraulic brake system requires
electrical power to operate.

Warning!

Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.

A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. The same applies if
battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to
the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adjust your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to
“Electro-hydraulic brake system”
(컄 page 89).

With a disconnected battery

432

앫

you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever will
have no effect

앫

the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P

왘

Depress parking brake firmly or move
gear selector lever to position P.

왘

Turn off all electrical consumers.

왘

Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘

Press the start/stop button until
the engine shuts off.

왘

Open the driver’s door.

Practical hints
Battery
왘

Open the trunk.

Removing the battery

왘

Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 431).

왘

Remove the luggage box (컄 page 401).

왘

Disconnect battery negative lead 2.

왘

Remove cover 1 from the positive terminal.

왘

Disconnect the battery positive lead.

Remove the screw-nuts securing the
battery.

왘

Remove the battery bracket.

왘

Pull out the battery ventilation tube
from the battery (depending on battery
arrangement in your vehicle model, the
battery ventilation tube is located on
the left or right side of the battery).

왘

Take out the battery.

Charging and reinstalling the battery

Warning!

Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit* approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit* specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information and availability. Charge battery in
accordance with the separate instructions
for the accessory battery charger*.

433

Practical hints
Battery
왘

왘

Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.

Reconnecting the battery
왘

Turn off all electrical consumers.

Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in reverse order.

왘

Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.

왘

Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover.

앫

Set the clock (컄 page 162)
(see COMAND operator’s manual).

왘

Connect the negative lead.

앫

Resynchronize the ESP®
(컄 page 368).

앫

Resynchronize the side windows
(컄 page 216).

앫

Resynchronize the tilt/sliding sunroof (컄 page 221).

!
The battery, its filler caps and the
battery ventilation tube must always be
securely installed when the vehicle is in
operation.

!
Never invert the terminal connections!
왘

Install the luggage box (컄 page 401).

The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):

Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.

434

Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
Warning!

Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.

Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

!
Jump starting must only be performed
on the main battery installed in the
trunk.

If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:

Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.

앫

Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.

앫

Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.

앫

Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

앫

Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.

Do not attempt to start the engine
using a battery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.

435

Practical hints
Jump starting
앫

Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when the engine is
started or running.
Warning!

왘

Connect positive terminals 1 and 3
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 3
first.

왘

Connect negative terminals 4 and 2
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 4
first.

왘

Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

Never invert the terminal connections!

Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.

The message Malfunction - electric
consumers switched off may appear
in the instrument cluster. It will disappear as soon as the battery is sufficiently charged.

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 299).

The main battery is located in the trunk underneath the luggage box (컄 page 401).
왘

Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.

왘

Turn off all electrical consumers.

왘

Apply parking brake.

왘

Shift gear selector lever to position P.

Now you can again turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
1 Positive terminal of discharged battery
2 Negative terminal of discharged battery
3 Positive terminal of charged battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
왘

436

Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.

왘

Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 2 and 4 and then
from positive terminals 1 and 3.

Now you can turn on the lights.
왘

Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the
vehicle be transported with all wheels off
the ground using flatbed or appropriate
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is
preferable to other types of towing.

!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.

!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts.
Switch off the tow-away alarm (if
equipped) and the automatic central
locking

When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the
vehicle may be towed with all wheels on
the ground or front wheels raised only so
far as necessary to have the vehicle moved
to a safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.

!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of
damage to the drive train, however, we
recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for
any towing beyond a short tow to a
nearby garage.

!
If the vehicle is towed with the front
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1). Otherwise the ESP® will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear
wheel brakes.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the selector lever must
be in position N and the SmartKey
must be in starter switch position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground or the front axle raised,
the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).

437

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle

Warning!

If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫

the engine will not run

앫

there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system

앫

there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system

as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
remove SmartKey from starter switch and
reinsert.

438

Warning!

The brake system requires electrical power
to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to
the front wheels. Stopping distance is increased! Adapt your driving style accordingly. For more information, refer to
“Electro-hydraulic brake system”
(컄 page 89).
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the steering system. In
this case, it is important to keep in mind that
a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

i
To signal turns while being towed with
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn
signal in the usual manner – only the
selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!

When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, please note the following:

The selector lever will remain locked in
position P and the SmartKey will not
turn in the starter switch if the battery
is disconnected or discharged. For
more information see “Battery”
(컄 page 431) or “Jump starting”
(컄 page 435).

With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button in position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel
as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm (if
equipped) (컄 page 95).
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (컄 page 122).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.

Installing towing eye bolt
Front of vehicle

Manual unlocking of the transmission
selector lever (컄 page 404).

1 Cover on right side of front bumper
To remove cover:
왘

Press mark on cover in direction of arrow.

왘

Lift cover off to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.

439

컄컄

Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
컄컄 The

towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).
왘

Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.

To reinstall cover:
왘

Fit cover and snap into place.

Rear of vehicle

To remove cover:
왘

Press mark on cover in the direction of
the arrow.

왘

Fold cover down to reveal the threaded
hole for the towing eye bolt.

The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compartment under the trunk floor).
왘

Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.

To reinstall cover:
왘

2 Cover on right side of rear bumper

440

Fit cover and snap into place.

Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
Fuses are designed to protect the electrical circuits in your vehicle from a short circuit. If a fuse is blown, the component(s)
and systems secured by that fuse will stop
operating.
The following aids are available to help you
replace fuses (컄 page 441):
앫

Fuse chart

앫

Spare fuses

앫

Fuse extractor
Warning!

Aids for replacing fuses

Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Fuse chart

!
Keep the fuse boxes free by contermination and wetness. Otherwise, electrical parts or systems could be
damaged.

Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system
in question. Using other fuses may cause an
overload leading to a fire, or and/or cause
damage to electrical components and/or
systems.

The fuse chart is located in the fuse box in
the passenger compartment (컄 page 442).
The amperages of the fuses are also given
there.
Spare fuses
Spare fuses are located in the vehicle tool
kit in the trunk (컄 page 399).

The electrical fuses are located in different
fuse boxes:

Fuse extractor

앫

Main fuse box in passenger compartment (컄 page 442)

The fuse extractor is located in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk (컄 page 399).

앫

Fuse box in trunk (컄 page 442)

441

Practical hints
Fuses
Main fuse box in passenger compartment

Opening
왘

Open the front passenger door.

왘

Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in into
on the edge of cover 1 at the position
indicated by the arrow.

왘

Loosen cover 1 from the dashboard
using lever.

왘

Using your hands, pull cover 1 in the
direction of the arrow and remove.

Closing
1 Cover

왘

!
Do not use sharp objects such as a
screw driver to open the fuse box
cover 1 in the dashboard, as this
could damage it.

442

왘

Hook cover 1 into the opening at the
front.
Press cover 1 back on until it engages.

Fuse box in trunk

2 Cover
3 Catches
왘

Turn catches 3 counter-clockwise
and remove cover 2.

Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

443

Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.

444

!
The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.

Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information Booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫

New Car Limited Warranty

앫

Emission System Warranty

앫

Emission Performance Warranty

앫

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty

Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories Warranties, copies of which
are available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

445

Technical data
Identification labels

1 Certification label (includes Paintwork
code)

2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

3 Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards
4 Vacuum line routing diagram label
5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(lower edge of windshield)
6 Engine number (engraved on engine)

i
When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers.

446

Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
CLS 500

CLS 55 AMG

1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley

The CLS 55 AMG has two poly-V-belts
(belt one shown in purple/belt two shown
in black).

1 Idler pulley
2 Automatic belt tensioner
3 Power steering pump
4 Air conditioning compressor
5 Crankshaft
6 Coolant pump
7 Generator (alternator)
8 Idler pulley
9 Automatic belt tensioner
a Super charger

447

Technical data
Engine

Model

CLS 500 (219.375)

CLS 55 AMG (219.3761)

Engine

M113

Mode of operation

4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

No. of cylinders

Bore

3.82 in (97.00 mm)

Stroke

3.31 in (84.00 mm)

3.60 in (92.00 mm)
3

Total piston displacement

303.0 cu in (4966 cm )

331.8 cu in (5439 cm3)

Compression ratio

10:1

9:1
rpm2

Output acc. to SAE J 1349

302 hp/5600
(225 kW/5600 rpm)

469 hp/6100 rpm2
(350 kW/6100 rpm)

Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349

339 lb-ft/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm
(460 Nm/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm)

516 lb-ft/2650 rpm - 4500 rpm
(700 Nm/2650 rpm - 4500 rpm)

Maximum engine speed

6300 rpm

6500 rpm

Firing order

1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Poly-V-belt

Belt one: 2390 mm

Belt one: 1289 mm
Belt two: 2449 mm

1
2

The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

448

Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
!
Only use tires which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving
safety systems on your vehicle such as
ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed
for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the following on the
tire’s sidewall:
앫

MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
equipment tires
AMG vehicles:
Does not apply to all approved tires
on AMG vehicles. For information
on tested and approved tires for
AMG vehicles, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

앫

Using tires other than those approved
by Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i
For information on driving with
MOExtended tires, see
“MOExtended system*” (컄 page 321).

!
Using tires other than those approved
by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, such as
앫

poor handling characteristics

앫

increased noise

앫

increased fuel consumption

Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load,
exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result.

MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original
Extended (tires with limited run-flat
characteristics) original equipment
tires

449

Technical data
Rims and tires

Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with
the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds
(컄 page 312) or for vehicle loads less
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided,
it can be found on the placard located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The
tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.

The following pages also list the approved wheel rim and tire sizes for
equipping your vehicles with winter
tires. Winter tires are not available as
standard or optional factory equipment, but can be purchased from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

450

Depending on vehicle model and the
standard or optional factory-equipped
wheel rim/tire configuration on your
vehicle (Appearance Package, Sport
Package etc.), equipping your vehicle
with winter tires approved for your vehicle model may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the
recommended size for use with these
winter tires. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for more information.

Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
CLS 500
Rims (light alloy)

8.5 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset (front axle)

1.38 in (28 mm)

Wheel offset (rear axle)

0.71 in (18 mm)

Summer

tires1
1,2

Winter tires
1
2

245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.

Radial-ply tires
Not available as factory equipment.

!
Winter tires on rims with different
wheel offset front vs. rear cannot be
rotated.

451

Technical data
Rims and tires

CLS 500 (Sport Package*)

CLS 55 AMG

Rims (light alloy)

8.5 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset

0.98 in (25 mm)

Summer

tires1

Winter tires
1
2

1,2

245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S. 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.

Radial-ply tires
Not available as factory equipment.

CLS 55 AMG (Performance Package*)
Rims (light alloy)

8.5 J x 19 H2

Wheel offset

0.98 in (25 mm)

Summer tires
Winter tires
1
2
3

1,2,3

245/35 R19 93V XL (Extra Load) M+S.

Radial-ply tires
Not available as factory equipment.
Maximum permissible vehicle speed of 137 mph (220 km/h).

452

Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
CLS 500

CLS 500 (Sport Package*)

Rims (light alloy)

8.5 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset

1.10 in (28 mm)

0.98 in (25 mm)

Summer tires

255/40 ZR18 95Y
or
255/40 ZR18 99Y XL (Extra Load)

All-season tires1

245/40 R18 93V M+S

Winter tires

Rims (light alloy)

9.5 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset

1.30 in (33 mm)

1.10 in (28 mm)

Summer tires

285/35 ZR18 97Y
or
285/35 ZR18 101Y XL (Extra Load)

All-season tires1, 2

275/35 R18 95V M+S

Winter tires

Front axle:

Rear axle:

1,2

1
2

Radial-ply tires
Must not be used with snow chains.

453

Technical data
Rims and tires

CLS 55 AMG

Rims (light alloy)

8.5 J x 18 H2

8.5 J x 19 H2

Wheel offset

0.98 in (25 mm)

255/40 ZR18 99Y XL (Extra Load)

255/35 ZR19 96Y XL (Extra Load)

Rims (light alloy)

9.5 J x 18 H2

9.5 J x 19 H2

Wheel offset

1.10 in (28 mm)

285/35 ZR18 101Y XL (Extra Load)

285/30 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load)

Front axle:

Summer tires

Winter tires
Rear axle:

Summer tires

1,2

Winter tires
1
2

Radial-ply tires
Must not be used with snow chains.

454

Technical data
Rims and tires

CLS 55 AMG (Performance Package*)

Rims (light alloy)

8.5 J x 19 H2

Wheel offset

0.98 in (25 mm)

255/35 ZR19 96Y XL (Extra Load)

245/35 R19 93V XL (Extra Load) M+S.

Rims (light alloy)

9.5 J x 19 H2
or
10 J x 19 H2

9.5 J x 19 H2

Wheel offset

1.10 in (28 mm)

285/30 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load)

275/30 R19 96V XL (Extra Load) M+S.

Front axle:

Summer tires
Winter

tires1,3

Rear axle:

1,2

Summer tires

1,2,3

Winter tires
1
2
3

Radial-ply tires.
Must not be used with snow chains.
Not available as factory equipment.

455

Technical data
Rims and tires
MOExtended tires*
CLS 500
CLS 500 (Sport Package*)

CLS 500
CLS 500 (Sport Package*)

Rims (light alloy)

8.5 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset

1.10 in (28 mm)

245/40 R18 93Y MOExtended

245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S .MOExtended

Rims (light alloy)

9.5 J x 18 H2

8.5 J x 18 H2

Wheel offset

1.30 in (33 mm)

0.71 in (18 mm)

275/35 R18 95Y MOExtended

245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S .MOExtended

Front axle:

Summer tires
Winter tires

1,2

1,2,3

Rear axle:

Summer

tires1,2,4

Winter tires
1
2
3
4

1,2,3

Radial-ply tires.
Must be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles), Run Flat Indicator (Canada vehicles), or
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (Canada only).
Not available as factory equipment.
Must not be used with snow chains.

456

Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
CLS 500
CLS 500 (Sport Package*)

CLS 55 AMG

Rim

4.0 B x 17 H2

6.0 B x 18 H2

Wheel offset

1.34 in (34 mm)

Minispare tire

T 155/70 R17

Collapsible tire

0.98 in (25 mm)

110M1

175/55-18 95P1

Must not be used with snow chains.

Please compare the recommended tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle with
the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
label located on the spare wheel rim.

Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the Minispare tire and the
collapsible tire differs from the tire
inflation pressure of the road tires.

If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs
from the values given in this Operator’s
Manual, inflate the spare wheel tire to
the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the
spare wheel rim.

Make sure the Minispare tire is inflated
to approximately 61 psi (4.2 bar).

The CLS 55 AMG with Performance
Package* does not have a spare wheel.
The CLS 55 AMG with Performance
Package* is equipped with TIREFIT
(컄 page 419).

Inflate the collapsible tire to approximately 51 psi (3.5 bar).

457

Technical data
Electrical system

Model

CLS 500

CLS 55 AMG

Generator (alternator)

14 V/150 A

14 V/180 A

Starter motor

14 V/1.7 kW

14 V/1.4 kW

Battery (auxiliary)

12 V/12 Ah

Battery (main)

12 V/95 Ah

Spark plugs

Bosch F8 DPP 332U
NGK PFR 5R-11

NGK IL FR6 A

Electrode gap

0.039 in (1.00 mm)

0.031 in (0.8 mm)

Tightening torque

18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)

458

Technical data
Main dimensions
왔 Main dimensions
Model

CLS 500

CLS 55 AMG

Overall vehicle length

190.3 in (4913 mm)

193.5 in (4915 mm)

Overall vehicle width (exterior rear
view mirrors folded out)

81.1 in (2059 )

81.1 in (2059 mm)

Overall vehicle height (Airmatic DC)

54.5 in (1390 mm)

54.5 in (1389 mm)

Wheelbase

112.4 in (2854 mm)

Track, front

62.5 in (1587 mm)

63 in (1599 mm)

Track, rear

63 in (1600 mm)

62.3 in (1583 mm)

Overall vehicle height

459

Technical data
Weights

Roof load max.

220 lb (100 kg)

Trunk load max.

220 lb (100 kg)

460

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities

Engine with oil filter

Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Model

Capacity

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

CLS 500

8.0 US qt (7.5 l)

Approved engine oils

CLS 55 AMG

9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

Automatic transmission CLS 500
CLS 55 AMG
Rear axle

Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products Pamphlet, or inquire at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid

8.67 US qt (8.2 l)
1.37 US qt (1.3 l)

Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90

461

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Model

Capacity

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Power steering

approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)

MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)

Front wheel hubs

approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each

High temperature roller bearing grease

Brake system

1.1 US qt (1.05 l)

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)

CLS 500

11.9 US qt (11.3 l)

MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze

CLS 55 AMG

13.84 US qt (13.1 l)

MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze

21.12 US gal (80.0 l)

Premium unleaded gasoline
Minimum Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96
RON/86 MON)

Cooling system
Fuel tank
including a reserve of

462

2.38 US gal (9.0 l)

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Model

Capacity

Air conditioning system
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system
1

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil
(never R-12)

7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1

Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 470).

463

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles). For a listing of approved engine
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those
called for by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles) will result in engine damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

464

Please follow Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles) recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could
result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Brake fluid
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere.

Engine oil additives

Warning!

Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.

Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the
formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.

Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.

Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.

Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information.

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
!

Premium unleaded gasoline

Warning!

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!

Gasoline additives

To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
gasoline is not available and low octane
fuel is used, follow these precautions:
앫

Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible

앫

Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration

앫

Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage

앫

Do not exceed /3 of maximum
accelerator pedal position if the
vehicle is fully loaded or operating
in mountainous terrain

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
앫

Warm-up hesitation

앫

Unstable idle

앫

Knocking/pinging

앫

Misfire

앫

Power loss

465

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory
Approved Service Products Pamphlet for a
listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label.

Fuel requirements

Coolants

Only use premium unleaded gasoline
meeting ASTM standard D 439.
The octane number (posted at the pump)
must be 91 min. It is an average of both the
Research (R) Octane Number and the Motor (M) Octane Number: (R+M)/2). This is
also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:

Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary costs and
may be harmful to the engine operation.

Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.

Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested
and approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

466

앫

Corrosion protection

앫

Freeze protection

앫

Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)

The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used
year-round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper
level.

To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to freeze
protection to approximately - 22°F
(-30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze
protection to approximately - 49°F
(-45°C)], the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use
more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.

If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should
be used to bring it up to the proper level
(have cooling system checked for signs of
leakage). Please make sure the mixture is
in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

467

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)

468

Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model

Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C)

– 49°F (– 45°C)

CLS 500

6.0 US qt (5.7 l)

6.6 US qt (6.2 l)

CLS 55 AMG

7.0 US qt (6.55 l)

7.7 US qt (7.2 l)

469

Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Both the windshield and headlamp washer
systems are supplied from the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approximately 7.4 US qt. (7.0 l).

왘

Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).

Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above “freezing point”,
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“S” and water:
앫

Warning!

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You can be seriously burned.

1 part “S” to 100 parts water

(1.34 floz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l] water).
For temperatures below “freezing point”
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“S” and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫

1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent

(1.34 floz [40 ml “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l] solvent).

470

Technical terms

ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
Accessory weight
(컄 page 332)
ADS
(Adaptive Damping System)
Automatically adapts the optimum suspension damping to prevailing driving
conditions.
Air pressure
(컄 page 332)

Airmatic DC
(Airmatic Dual Control)
Automatically selects the optimum
suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle. Airmatic consists of two
components:
앫

Adaptive Damping System

앫

Vehicle level control

Alignment bolt
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
Aspect ratio
(컄 page 332)

BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the passenger front air bag when such
a seat is properly installed (the
57 indicator lamp in the
center console comes on and remains
illuminated).
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the passenger front air bag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed. See
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.

471

Technical terms

Bar
(컄 page 332)
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
Bead
(컄 page 332)
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
Headlamps which use an electric arc as
a light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
beam and high beam.

472

CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service
center which can help you with any
questions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control
vehicle functions such as door locking
or windshield wiping.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.

Cold tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 332)
Collapsible tire
An especially compact spare tire that
must be inflated with a provided air
pump before using. It should only be
used to bring the vehicle to the nearest
service station.
COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data
System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and navigation system, as well as other optional
equipment (CD changer, telephone,
etc.).

Technical terms

Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to
adjust settings.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
Distronic*
A driving convenience cruise control
system which helps the driver maintain
a pre-selected speed:
앫

If there is no vehicle directly ahead,
the system operates in the same
way as conventional ->cruise control.

앫

If a slower moving vehicle is ahead,
Distronic will reduce your vehicle
speed to the extent permitted by
reduced throttle and up to 20%
braking power to maintain the preset minimum following distance.

DOT
(Department of Transportation)
(컄 page 332)
DTR
(->Distronic*)
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.

Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction
(viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system’s threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS

473

Technical terms

FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles)
(Flexible Service System PLUS)
Maintenance service indicator in the
multifunction display that informs the
driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. FSS evaluates
engine temperature, oil level, vehicle
speed, engine speed, distance driven
and the time elapsed since your last
service, calculates other maintenance
service work required, and calls for the
next maintenance service accordingly.
GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(컄 page 332)
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.

474

GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special
receivers. Employs DVD digital maps
for navigation.
GVW
(Gross Vehicle Weight)
(컄 page 332)
GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
(컄 page 333)
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer
and fuel gauge.

KEYLESS-GO*
System for entering and operating the
vehicle without the use of a SmartKey.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Kilopascal (kPa)
(컄 page 333)
Locking knob
Knob on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the locking knob down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.

Technical terms

Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)
Maintenance service indicator in the
multifunction display that informs the
driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. The Vehicle Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks
distance driven and the time elapsed
since your last maintenance service,
calculates other maintenance service
work required, and calls for the next
maintenance service accordingly.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(컄 page 333)
Maximum load rating
(컄 page 333)
Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 333)

Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirror positions.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
The display field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system.

Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.
Normal occupant weight
(컄 page 333)
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
on the tachometer dial. Avoid this
engine speed range, as it may result in
serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Parktronic (Parking assist)*
System which uses visual and acoustic
signals to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.

475

Technical terms

Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, including:
앫

Engine

앫

Clutch/torque converter

앫

Transmission

앫

Transfer case*

앫

Drive shaft

앫

Axle shafts/axles

Production options weight
(컄 page 333)

476

Program mode selector switch
Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation S and
operation C.
CLS 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift control and manual shift program:
in addition to S and C (for sporty S or
comfortable C operation), you can use
M for manual shift program.
PSI
(Pounds per square inch)
(컄 page 333)
Recommended tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 333)
Restraint systems
Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags and
child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.

Rim
(컄 page 333)
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Electro-hydraulic brake system
Electronically controlled hydraulic
braking system for increased braking
safety and comfort.
Sidewall
(컄 page 333)

Technical terms

Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission selector lever from being moved out of position P
without the ignition or engine on and
brake pedal depressed.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and air bags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.

Tele Aid System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially
activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational
provided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Telematics*
A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”.

Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
TIN
(Tire Identification Number)
(컄 page 334)
Tire load rating
(컄 page 334)
Tire ply composition and material used
(컄 page 334)
Tire speed rating
(컄 page 334)
Traction
(컄 page 334)
Tread
(컄 page 334)

477

Technical terms

Treadwear indicators
(컄 page 334)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire
(컄 page 334)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 334)

VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.

Vehicle capacity weight
(컄 page 334)
Vehicle level control
The ground clearance of the vehicle is
automatically controlled according to a
selected setting and speed.The driver
can set the ground clearance manually
for example on very rough roads.

478

Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).

Index

A
ABS 84
Indicator lamp 352
Messages in display 365
Accelerator position 180
Accessory weight 332
Accident 57
Active head restraint 74, 124
Adjusting 39
Air bags 65
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system 471
Children 78
Children in the vehicle 66
Front, Driver 69
Front, Passenger 69
Safety guidelines 68
Side impact 70
Window curtain 70
Air conditioning, Cooling 209
Air distribution 204
Air pressure 332

Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Air pump, electric 428
Air recirculation mode 206
Air vents 197
Rear passenger compartment 210
Air volume 205
Airmatic DC
Message in display 396, 397
Airmatic DC (Dual Control) 238
Alarm
Audible 83
Canceling 95
Visual 93
Alarm system see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 399, 425
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 468
Antilock brake system see ABS
Anti-theft systems 93
Anti-theft alarm system 93
Immobilizer 93
Tow-away alarm 95
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning

Ashtrays 257
Aspect ratio 332
At the gas station 290
AUDIO menu 153
Audio system
CD mode 154
Auto-dimming, Rear view mirrors 191
Automatic central locking, control
system 168
Automatic climate control
4-zone automatic climate
control 196
Automatic climate control (4-zone) 196
Air recirculation mode 206
Deactivating 201
Maximum cooling MAX COOL 206
Rear air conditioning 210
Rear window defroster 195
Setting the temperature 203
Automatic headlamp mode 135
Automatic lighting control, Interior
lighting 141

479

Index

Automatic transmission 176
Accelerator position 180
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) 190
Gear ranges 181
Gear selector lever position 178
Gear shifting malfunctions 190
Kickdown 180
Kickdown, manual shift program
(CLS 55 AMG) 190
Manual shift program mode
(CLS 55 AMG) 188
Manual shifting 183
One-touch gearshifting 183
Program mode selector switch 182
Selector lever position 176
Starting the engine 49
Winter program mode 182

480

B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 78
Compatible child seats 471
Self-test 79
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system 471
Backrest
Seat, multicontour* 126
Seat, power 40
Backup lamps
Messages in display 387
Bar 332
BAS 86, 472
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 408
Checking battery condition 102
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Checking 109
Battery
Jump starting 435

Battery, vehicle 431
Charging 433
Disconnecting 432
Messages in display 369, 373
Reconnecting 434
Removing 433
Bead 332
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 472
Block heater* (Canada only) 337
Brake assist system (BAS) 472
Brake fluid 291
Messages in display 377
Brake lamp
Messages in display 387
Brake pads
Message in display 374
Brakes
Warning lamp 354
Break-in period 278
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs

Index

C
California retail buyers and lessees,
important notice for 11
CAN system 472
Cargo tie-down hooks 250
Carpets, cleaning 349
CD changer* 154
CD player 154
Center console
Lower part 28
Upper part 27
Central locking
Automatic 122
Locking/unlocking from inside 122
Switch 122
Switching on/off
(control system) 168
Central locking switch 122
Certification label 310
Checking tire pressure electronically with
the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System* (Advanced TPMS*),
(Canada only) 316

Children in the vehicle 75
Air bags 66
Blocking of rear window operation 82
Indicator lamp, front passenger front
air bag 78
Infant and child restraint systems 76
LATCH-type child seat anchors 81
Cigarette lighter 258
Climate control system
Adjusting air distribution 204
Adjusting air volume 205
Air conditioning, Cooling 209
Automatic mode 202
Front defroster 205
Residual engine heat (REST) 209
Clock 25, 162
CLS 55 AMG
MANUAL shift program mode 188
Cockpit 22, 472
Cockpit management and data system see
COMAND
Cold tire inflation pressure 332
Collapsible tire
Tire inflation pressure 427

Collapsible tire, description 472
Collapsible wheel chock 400
COMAND* see separate operating
rnstructions
Combination filter with pollutant-sensitive
air-recirculation mode 208
Combination switch 53, 138
Control system 147, 473
Functions 151
Multifunction display 147
Multifunction steering wheel 148
Control system menus 150, 151
AUDIO 153
Distronic* 155
NAV* 155
Settings 157
Standard display 153
TEL* 172
Trip computer 171
Vehicle status message memory 156

481

Index

Control system submenus
Convenience 168
Instrument cluster 160
Lighting 164
Time/Date 162
Vehicle 168
Convenience submenu 168
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature* 168
Setting parking position for exterior
rear view mirror 169
Coolant
Checking level 297
Messages in display 378, 379, 380
Temperature 289
Temperature gauge 145
Warning lamp 357
Cruise control 222, 473
Canceling 224
Driving downhill 223
Driving uphill 223
Fine adjustment 225
Lever 231
Saving current speed 223
Setting speeds 225

482

Cruise control lever 222, 231
Cup holders 255
Cleaning 349
Curb weight 332
Customer Assistance Center see CAC
D
Date display, setting 163, 164
Daytime running lamp mode 136
Setting 164
Deceleration
With Distronic* 230
Defogging windshield 206
Delayed switch-off
Interior lighting 167
Department of Transportation see DOT
Dialing
A number (telephone) 174
Difficulties
While driving 56
With starting 51
Digital speedometer 153
Direction of rotation (tires) 304

Displays
Digital speedometer 153
Distronic* 228
Maintenance service indicator 339
Multifunction display 147
Selecting 161
Symbol messages 373
Text messages 365
Vehicle status message memory 156
Distance
Decreasing in Distronic* 235
Increasing in Distronic* 234
Warning function 235
Distance to empty (range)
Trip computer 171
Distronic* 226, 473
Activating/deactivating 231
Cleaning system sensor 346
Distance warning function 235
Driving hints 236
Intermittent warning sound 235
Menu 230
Messages in display 366
Sensor cover 346
Symbol in multifunction display 155
Warning and indicator lamps 229

Index

Door
Entry lamps 143
Message in display 382
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 269
Door control panel 32
Door handle 32
Doors
Opening from inside vehicle 111
DOT 332, 473
Drinking and driving 279
Drive-dynamic seat* 127
Driving
Abroad 287
Hydroplaning 283
In winter 285
Instructions 46
Problems 56
Safety systems 84
Systems 222
Through standing water 287
Driving hints
Electro-hydraulic brake system 92
Driving instructions 279
Driving off 282

Driving safety systems
ABS 84
BAS 86
Electro-hydraulic brake system
ESP® 86, 473
Driving systems 222
Airmatic DC 238
Cruise control 222
Distronic* 226
Driving safety systems 84
Vehicle level control 239
DTR see Distronic*
Dual control
Airmatic DC 238

E
Easy-entry/exit feature* 42
Electric air pump 427
Electrical fuses see fuses
Electrical system, Technical data 458

Electro-hydraulic brake system 89, 476
Activation 90
Deactivation 91
Driving hints 92
Messages in display 375, 376
Self-check 91
Warning lamp 89
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Emergency calls
Tele Aid calls 263
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) 190
Emergency operations 406
Fuel filler flap 404
Gear selector lever, Unlocking 404
Locking/unlocking the vehicle 402
Power tilt/sliding sunroof,
manual operation 406
Remote door unlock 269
Trunk lid, Releasing trunk from
inside 120
Trunk lid, Unlocking 403
Emergency tensioning device see ETD

483

Index

Emission control 289
Emission control information label 446
Emission control system warranties 10
Emission control vacuum line routing
diagram label 446
Engine 448
Belt layout 447
Block heater* (Canada only) 337
Break-in recommendations 278
Cleaning 344
Compartment 293
Malfunction indicator lamp 355
Maximum engine speed 448
Number 473
Starting 49
Technical data 448
Turning off with the key 60
Engine compartment
Hood 293

484

Engine oil
Adding 296
Additives 464
Changing 464
Checking level 294
Consumption 294
Filler neck 297
Messages in display 295, 382, 383
Recommended engine oils rand
oil filters 464
Viscosity 473
Engine oil level 295
ESP® 86, 473
Synchronizing 368
Warning lamp 353
ETD 73, 473
Safety guidelines 68
Exterior lamp switch 134
Exterior rear view mirrors 44
Parking position 169, 192

F
First aid kit 398
Flat tire 419
Collapsible tire 426, 427
Jacking up the vehicle 425
Lowering the vehicle 429
Mounting the spare wheel 423, 426
Preparing the vehicle 419
Spare wheel 423
TIREFIT kit* 419
Flexible Service System
(Canada vehicles) 339
Flexible Service System (FSS) 474
Floormats 260
Fog lamp, rear 138
Fog lamps
Messages in display 387, 388, 389,
390
Fog lamps, front
Switching on 137
Front lamps 412
Replacing bulbs 414
Switching on 134

Index

Front seats
Heating* 128
FSS (Canada vehicles) 339
FSS (Flexible Service System) 474
Fuel 291
Fuel reserve warning lamp 358
Premium unleaded gasoline 291
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 171
Since last reset 171
Fuel filler flap 290
Locking 290
Opening 290
Unlocking 290
Fuel requirements 466
Fuel tank
Filler flap 290
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 461
Fuse box in trunk 442
Fuses 441
Fuse chart 441
Fuse extractor 441
Replacing 441
Spare fuses 441

G
Garage door opener* 270
Gasoline see Fuel 291
GAWR 332
Gear range 474
Automatic transmission 181
Limiting 181
Shifting into optimal 183
Gear selector lever
Cleaning 349
Position 178
Global
Locking 101
Locking with KEYLESS-GO* 107
Unlocking 100
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 107
Global Positioning System (GPS) 474
Glove box 251
Good visibility 191
GPS 474
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 332
GVWR 333

H
Hands-free microphone 29
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 349
Hazard warning flasher 140
Head restraint
Active head restraint 74, 124
Head restraints
resetting activated 407
Headlamps
Automatic headlamp mode 135
Bi-Xenon* 472
Cleaning lenses 346
Cleaning system* 191
Deactivating 59
Headliner, cleaning 350
Heated seats* 128
Height adjustment
Head restraints 41
Steering wheel 41
Vehicle level 239
High beam flasher 53, 138
High beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs 415
Switching on 53, 138
High mounted brake lamp 412

485

Index

Hood 293
Message in display 384
HVAC see 4-zone automatic climate
control
Hydroplaning 283
I
Identification labels 446
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) 446
Ignition 36, 38, 50
Immobilizer 93
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems see
Children in the vehicle
Information
About service and warranty 10
Button for Tele Aid 267
Inside door handle 111
Inside rear view mirror
Antiglare 191

486

Installing
Infant and child restraint systems 80
Towing eye bolt 439
Wiper blades 418
Instrument cluster 24, 144, 474
Cleaning 349
Coolant temperature gauge 145
Illumination 144
Multifunction display 147
Outside temperature indicator 146
Interior lighting 141
Delayed switch-off 167
Interior rear view mirror 44
J
Jack 398, 399
Jacking up the vehicle
Jump starting 435

425

K
Key, Mechanical 402
Key, SmartKey
Changing batteries 408
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Changing batteries 409
KEYLESS-GO* 110, 474
Activating ignition with 38
Closing
Trunk 117
Factory setting 107
Global locking 107
Global unlocking 107
Important notes 105
Remote controls 103
Starting the engine 50
Turning off engine 60
Unlocking and opening, trunk 110
Unlocking with 35
Kickdown 180, 474
Kilopascal 333

Index

L
Labels 446
Lamp bulbs, exterior 411
Lamps, exterior
Front 412
Messages in display 387
Rear 412
Replacing bulbs for rear 416
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 352
Air bag Off 69
Battery (SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*) 107
Battery (SmartKey) 101
Brakes 354
Coolant 357
DTR* 229, 235
Electro-hydraulic brake system 89
Engine diagnostics 355
ESP® 353
Fog lamps 137
Front passenger front air bag off 78
Fuel reserve 358
Seat belts 358
SRS 65

Language, Setting 160
LATCH child seat anchors 81
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 447
Leather upholstery, Cleaning and
care of 350
License plate lamps 412
Messages in display 388
Replacing bulbs 416
Light alloy wheels, cleaning 348
Lighter see Cigarette lighter 258
Lighting 134
Automatic headlamp mode 135
Combination switch 138
Daytime running lamp mode 136
Door entry lamps 143
Exterior lamp switch 134
Fog lamps 137
Front fog lamps 137
High beams 138
Instrument cluster illumination 144
Interior 141
Locator lighting 136
Low beam 134
Manual headlamp mode 135
Night security illumination 136

Parking lamps 134
Rear fog lamp 138
Settings (control system)
Trunk lamp 143
Limp-Home Mode 190
Loading 246
Instructions 247
Loading the vehicle 304
Locator lighting 136, 165
Lock button 62, 218
Locking 58, 98
Locking knob 474
Loss of SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 111
Loss of SmartKeys 103
Low beam headlamps 53
Replacing bulbs 414
Switching on 53
Lumbar support 125

164

487

Index

M
Main Dimensions 459
Maintenance 12
Calling up the service indicator 340
Clearing service indicator 340
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) 339
Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) 339
Messages in display 392
Service indicator 339
Service term exceeded 340
Maintenance service
Resetting maintenance service
indicator 341
Maintenance service indicator
message 339
Maintenance System (U.S.
vehicles) 339, 475
Manual headlamp mode 135
Manual operations
Unlocking the driver’s door 402
Unlocking the trunk lid 403
Manual shift program (CLS 55 AMG)
Deactivating 190
Massage function 128
Maximum load rating 333

488

Maximum loaded vehicle weight 333
Maximum tire inflation pressure 333
Mechanical key 402
Memory function 131, 475
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking positions 133
Storing SmartKey dependent
settings 132
Memory function*
Recalling positions from
memory 132
Menus
AUDIO 153
Distronic* 155, 230
In control system 150, 151
Standard display 153
Submenus 149
TEL* 172
Trip computer 171
Vehicle status message memory 156
Messages
Displaying 156
Microphone, Hands-free 29
Mirrors
Adjusting 44
Auto-dimming 191

Exterior rear view mirror 44
Exterior rear view mirror parking
positions 169, 192
Interior rear view mirror 44
Storing exterior mirror parking
position 133
MOExtended system* 321, 429
MOExtended tires* 456
MON 291
MON (Motor Octane Number) 475
Multicontour seat* 126
Multifunction display 147, 475
Selecting language 160
Multifunction display messages
ABS 365
Airmatic DC 396, 397
Batteries 369
Battery 373
Brake fluid 377
Brake pads 374
Check engine 355
Coolant 378, 379, 380
Cruise control 365
Distronic* 366
Door 382

Index

Electro-hydraulic brake system 375,
376
Engine oil 382, 383
ESP® 368
Fog lamps 387, 388, 389, 390
Hood 384
Light sensor 389
Maintenance service 392
Parking brake 375
Parking lamps 388
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 392
Reserve fuel 384
Seat belts 392
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 385,
386
SRS 393
Taillamps 390
Tele Aid 393
Telephone* 396
Tires 370, 395
Trunk 396
Turn signals 391
Windshield washer fluid 396
Multifunction steering wheel 26, 148,
475
Button operation 148

N
Navigation system
See separate COMAND operating
instructions 155
Night security illumination 136
Normal occupant weight 333
O
Occupant distribution 333
Occupant safety 64
Air bags 65
Children and air bags 66
Children in the vehicle 75
Fastening the seat belt 46
Infant and child restraint systems 76
LATCH-type child seat anchors 81
Seat belts 46, 68
Oil
Consumption 294
Viscosity 473
Oil see Engine oil
One-touch gearshifting 183
Opening
Fuel filler flap 290
Operating safety 16
Ornamental moldings, cleaning 345

Outside temperature indicator 146
Overdue maintenance service 339
Overhead control panel 29
Overspeed range, engine 475
P
Paintwork, Cleaning 343
Panic alarm 83
Parking 58
Parking brake 51, 59
Message in display 375
Parking lamps 412
Replacing bulbs 415
Switching on 134
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 133
Parktronic 242
Activating/deactivating 245
Minimum distance 243
Range 242
Warning indicators 244
Parktronic system (Parking assist)* see
Parktronic

489

Index

Parktronic* 475
Cleaning system sensors 347
Malfunctioning 245
Warning sounds 245
Parts service 444
Passenger compartment
Interior lighting 141
Interior rear view mirror 44
Main fuse box 442
Parcel net in the front passenger
footwell 254
Passenger safety see occupant safety
Pedals 279
Phone number*
Redialing 175
Plastic parts, cleaning 349
Poly-V-belt drive 475
Layout 447
Positions (Memory function*)
Recalling from memory 132
Storing into memory 132
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated
tires 321
Power assistance 280
Power outlet 259

490

Power seat
Adjusting backrest tilt 40
Adjusting head restraint height 41
Adjusting head restraint tilt 41
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 40
Adjusting seat height 40
Memory function 131
Seat fore and aft adjustment 40
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 219
Messages in display 392
Opening/closing 219
Opening/closing in an
emergency 406
Stopping 220
Synchronizing 221
Power train 476
Power washer 343
Power windows 214
Automatic opening/automatic
closing 216
Cleaning 347
Operating 214
Rear door window, Blocking
operation 82
Side windows 214
Synchronizing 216

Practical hints 352
Problems
While driving 56
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Production options weight 333
Program mode selector switch 476
Automatic transmission 182
PSI 333
PULSE function (Massage function) 128
Push-start see Tow-start
R
Radio
Selecting satellite radio stations*
(USA only) 154
Selecting stations 153
Radio transmitters 287
Range (distance to empty) 172
Rear door window
Blocking operation 82
Rear fog lamp
Switching on 138
Rear lamp 412
Rear lamps see Tail lamps

Index

Rear passenger compartment
Air vents 210
Rear storage compartment in the rear
center console 253
Rear view mirrors auto-dimming 191
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 195
Rear window sunshade* 194
Recommended tire inflation
pressure 333
Regular checks 291
Releasing seat belts 60
Remote control
SmartKey 98
Remote controls
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 103
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 269
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps 414
High beam headlamps 415
License plate lamps 416
Low beam headlamps 414
Parking lamps 415
Tail lamps 416
Turn signal lamp 415

Reporting safety defects 18
Reserve fuel
Message in display 384
Reset button in the instrument
cluster 158
Reset tool
Despositori 407
Resetting
Maintenance service indicator 341
Restraint system see Infant and child
restraint systems
Rims 333
Roadside assistance 12, 265
RON 291
RON (Research Octane Number) 476
Roof rack* 246
Rotating tires 335
Rubber parts, cleaning 349
Run Flat Indicator* 314

S
Safety
Driving safety systems 84
Occupant 64
Reporting defects 18
Safety belts see Seat belts
Seat belt force limiter 73
Seat belts 70
Cleaning 350
Fastening 46
Messages in display 392
Proper use of 48, 72
Safety guidelines 68
Telltale 358
Seat cushion depth
Adjusting 126
Seat heating*
Switching off 129
Switching on 129
Seat ventilation*
Switching off 130
Switching on 130
Seating capacity 306

491

Index

Seats 124
Adjusting 39
Drive-dynamic seat* 127
Easy entry/exit feature* 42
Heating* 128
Multicontour seat* 126
Ventilation* 130
Securing cargo 250
Selecting display 161
Selector lever
Lock 49, 176
Message in the display 369
Position (automatic
transmission) 176
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 79
Tele Aid 263
Service and warranty information 10
Service life
Tires 302
Setting
Date 163
Temperature (interior) 203

492

Settings
Date 163
Factory, KEYLESS-GO* 107
Factory, SmartKey 100
Individual, Vehicle 157
Menus and submenus 149
Resetting all, Control system 157
Selective, KEYLESS-GO* 107
Selective, SmartKey 101
Suspension tuning 238
Time 162
Settings menu
Functions in 157
Submenus 158
Shelf below rear window, cleaning 350
Shift lock 477
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 178
Into optimal gear range
(automatic transmission) 183
Into optimal gear range
(CLS 500) 185
Into optimal gear range
(CLS 55 AMG) 187

Side impact air bags 70
Side marker lamps
Cleaning lenses 346
Side windows
Stopping 216
Synchronizing power windows 216
Sidewall 333
Ski sack* (Canada only) 247
SmartKey 98
Battery check lamp 101
Checking the batteries 102, 109
Factory setting 100
Global locking 101
Global locking and unlocking 100
Global unlocking 100
Locking 61
Loss of 103
positions in starter switch 36
Remote control 98
Restoring to factory setting 102, 108
Selective setting 101, 107
Starting the engine 50
Turning off the engine 60
Unlocking with 34

Index

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 103
Battery check lamp 107
Changing 409
Global locking and unlocking 107
Loss of 111
Messages in display 385, 386, 389
Remote controls 103
Turning off the engine 60
Unlocking with 35
Snow chains 337
Spare fuses 441
Spare wheel 398, 457
Speed settings
Cruise control 225
Speedometer
Displays 228
Speedometer display mode
Selecting 160
Sporty driving style 238
SRS 477
Indicator lamp 25, 64, 359
Messages in display 393
Standing lamps 134
Standing water, Driving through 287

Starter switch 36
Positions 36
Starting difficulties 51
Starting the engine 49
Steering wheel
Cleaning 349, 350
Storage compartments 30, 251
Center armrest 252
Center console 252
Glove box 251
Seat 253
Storing
Tires 303
Storing (Memory function*)
Positions into memory 132
Submenus
Selecting 158
Settings menu 158
Sun visors 193
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 477
Suspension tuning
For comfortable driving style 238
For sporty driving style 238

T
Tachometer 146
Overspeed range 146
Tail lamps
Cleaning lenses 346
Replacing bulbs 416
Taillamps
Messages in display 390
Tar stains 343
Technical data
Rims and tires 449
Tele Aid 261
Call priority 268
Emergency calls 263
Hands-free microphone 29
Information 267
Initiating an emergency call
manually 264
Messages in display 393
Remote door unlock 269
Roadside assistance 265
SOS button 264
Stolen vehicle Recovery services
System self-check 263

269

493

Index

Tele Aid System 477
Telematics* 477
Telephone* 26, 260
Answering a call 173
Ending a call 174
Hands-free microphone 29
Messages in the display 396
Operation 172
Phone book 174
Redialing 175
Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 429, 477
Time 162
Synchronizing 162
TIN 334
Tire and Loading Information
Placard 305
Terminology 332
Tire inflation pressure 421
Checking 311
Tire inflation pressure see the placard on
the fuel filler flap
TIREFIT*
Instructions for use 419

494

Tires
Care and maintenance 302
Cleaning 303
Collapsible (Spare wheel) 472
Direction of rotation, Spinning 304
Driving instructions 282
Inflation pressure 311, 313
Inspection 302
Load rating 334
Low tire pressure telltale*
(Canada only) 360
Messages in display 370, 395
MOExtended system* 321, 429
Ply composition and material
used 334
Retreads 301
Rims and tires 449
Rotation 335
Service life 302
Speed rating 324, 334
Temperature 312, 331
Terminology 332

Tire Identification Number see TIN
TPMS malfunction telltale 360
Traction 284
Tread 334
Tread depth 303, 336
Treadwear indicators 334
Vehicle maximum load on 334
Wear pattern 335
Winter 336
Tools 399
Tow-away alarm 95
Towing eye bolt 439
Towing the vehicle 437
Tow-start 435, 437
Traction 182, 334
Transmission fluid level 297
Tread 334
Tread depth 303
Tread depth (tires) 336
Treadwear indicators 334
Trip computer 171
Trip odometer 146

Index

Trunk
Closing 114
Lamp 143
Message in display 396
Opening 112
Separately locking and
unlocking 121
Trunk lid emergency release 120
Unlocking and opening with
KEYLESS-GO* 110
Unlocking and opening with
SmartKey 103
Unlocking in an emergency 403
Valet locking 121
Turn signal lamp
Replacing bulbs 415
Turn signal lamps
Cleaning lenses 346
Turn signals 53
Additional in mirrors 412
Front bulbs 412
Messages in display 391
Turning off engine 60

U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards 334
Units, Settings
Speedometer 160
Temperature 161
Unleaded gasoline, Premium 465
Unlocking 34, 98
Trunk with KEYLESS-GO* 110
Unlocking in an emergency 402
Upshifting 183
Useful features 251
V
Vacuum line routing diagram label
Valet locking 121
Vehicle
Battery 431
Care 342
Dimensions 459
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency 402, 403
Lowering 429
Modifications and alterations,
operating safety 16

446

Towing 437
Unlocking in an emergency 402
Washing 344
Weights 460
Vehicle capacity weight 334
Vehicle jack 399
Vehicle level
Setting
Automatic 241
Vehicle level control system
Airmatic DC 238
Vehicle lighting
Checking 291
Vehicle loading
Cargo tie-down hooks 250
Instructions 247
Load limit 306
Roof rack* 246
Terminology 332
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 334
Vehicle status message memory 156
Vehicle tool kit 399
VIN 478
Voice control system* 478

495

Index

W
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function* 235
Distronic* 229
Parking brake 52
Parktronic* 245
Seat belt telltale 70
Warranty coverage 445
Washing the vehicle 342
Wear pattern, Tires 335
Weights, Vehicle 460
Wheel
Change 423
Removing 425
Tightening torque 429
Wheels, Tires and 301
Window curtain air bags 70
Windows see Power windows
Windows, cleaning 347

496

Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades 347
Defogging 206
Windshield washer fluid 300
Messages in display 396
Refilling 300
Wiping 55
Windshield wipers 54
Fast wiper speed 54
Intermittent wiping 54
Replacing wiper blades 417, 418
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 55
Winter driving
Block heater* (Canada only) 337
Snow chains 337
Tires 336
Winter driving instructions 285
Winter tires 336
Wood trims, cleaning 350

X
Xenon headlamps*
Bi-Xenon* 472

Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider
this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

Warning

To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time August 16, 2005
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2005:08:16 15:42:44Z
Modify Date                     : 2005:08:16 17:47:40+02:00
Page Count                      : 498
Creation Date                   : 2005:08:16 15:42:44Z
Mod Date                        : 2005:08:16 17:47:40+02:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author                          : nakamura
Metadata Date                   : 2005:08:16 17:47:40+02:00
Creator                         : nakamura
Title                           : C219.boo
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Mercedes Benz 2006 Cls 500 Users Manual C219.boo

Mercedes-Benz-2006-Cls-Class-500-And-55Amg-Owners-Manual-763339 mercedes-benz-2006-cls-class-500-and-55amg-owners-manual-763339

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation